JP2021118767A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a degree of freedom in design without sacrificing appearance of the game machine because of electronic components.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: an electronic component (for example, an LED boar 303) provided so as to be visible from a player; a specific member (for example, a base member 301) that is provided around the electronic component and is formed in color similar to that of the electronic component; and a light-transmitting member (for example, a cover member 302) that is a member having a light-transmitting property and allows the player to visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member. The light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern 331 formed so as to spread over the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-12

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

Some pachinko machines and slot machines, which are examples of game machines, are provided with electronic components such as display means such as a liquid crystal display and light emitting means such as an LED (light emitting diode).

As a game machine of this type, for example, a game board and a display device arranged apart from the game board on the back side are provided, and an opaque frame member is provided between the game board and the display device to play a game. Some of them prevent the inside of the gaming machine from being exposed from the gap formed between the back surface of the board and the display unit of the display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2007-296205

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in order to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being spoiled by making the electronic parts such as the display means and the light emitting means visible to the player, these electronic parts are made of frame members. It is necessary to install it inside the gaming machine that is invisible to the player, but there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design cannot be increased because the arrangement position of the electronic component is limited.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of freedom in design without spoiling the appearance of the gaming machine by electronic components.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
Electronic components (for example, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Guidance display means to be performed and
With
The translucent member (for example, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301). ) (See Fig. 10-12),
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
It is characterized in that the second guidance display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative patterns make the electronic components inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. In addition, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a player is urged to launch a game ball to the right by operating a ball launching handle during execution of a jackpot start effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147575. Some were configured to give right-handed instructions. However, there is still room for improvement in the instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in such a predetermined direction, and in view of this point, the instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction is given. There is a demand for a gaming machine that can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
It is characterized in that the second guidance display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control board which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the storage area which concerns on the characteristic part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the moving image data and a text display process table which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display process table which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display control example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the text display setting information which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the drawing command for effect which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect drawing composition processing which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the image processing which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the image display example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and the drawing processing pattern which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the drawing processing pattern which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a front view which shows the game board of the pachinko game machine as a feature part 75SG. 10-3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. It is a front view which shows the light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which saw the structure of the 1st effect unit diagonally from the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. It is E cross-sectional view. (A) is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED substrate, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. It is an enlarged view which shows the main part of FIG. 10-11 (B). (A) is a front view showing a variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line FF of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing a main part of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main part of the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for comparing the 1st production unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the similar color. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit in a state where the cover member is removed. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). (A) is a diagram for explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit. (A) is a front view which shows the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II of FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ of FIG. 10-20. It is a KK cross-sectional view of FIG. 10-20. It is explanatory drawing which shows the visual appearance state of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the characteristic part of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the frame lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of the image display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type table. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process after opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing during hit fluctuation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing after the end of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the parent table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the child table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine when it recovers from the electric power cutoff during the fanfare production by hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during one round of big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after one round of big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting a special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 3 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during 4 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 4 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from a power failure during the final round of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when returning from a power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting the special figure 1.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001).
Electronic components (for example, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members of the same color, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player,
A predetermined member (for example, a member for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component, and the like.
With
The predetermined member is characterized in having a color non-similar to that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for a predetermined electronic component that is difficult or invisible to the player, a general-purpose product can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined member, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the third form is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided.
The electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) is characterized in that it is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic component is inconspicuous because it is located away from the display means that the player pays attention to.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third forms.
A protrusion (for example, a protrusion 3A) that is provided above the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603,803) and projects toward the player from the electronic component is provided.
The protruding portion is characterized in that it is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component becomes a shadow of the protruding portion and becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603,803) and the specific member (for example, base member 601,801) are dark (for example, black) (variation example).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the electronic component is easily mixed with the shadow of the protruding portion, so that it becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects.
The specific member is characterized in that the color brightness or saturation is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The translucent member (for example, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301). ) (See Fig. 10-12)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative patterns make the electronic components inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board.
The specific member (for example, the base member 301) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) that shares at least a part of the form of the circuit pattern (for example, the printed wiring board 320) formed on the circuit board. It is provided (see Fig. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth form.
The specific member (for example, base member 301) has a predetermined region (for example, rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that can be visually recognized from the player side without passing through the translucent member (for example, cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member is provided in the predetermined area (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

The gaming machine of the tenth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
A decorative portion (for example, a decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (for example, the boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, the base member 401) is provided. (See Fig. 10-19)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic component is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the decorative portion, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design is increased. Can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect.
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts.
A plurality of predetermined decorative portions are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The plurality of decorative portions are characterized in that the number is larger than that of the plurality of predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative portions, so that the electronic component is made inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 12th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 11th forms.
The translucent member (for example, cover member 402) corresponds to a boundary corresponding region (for example, boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, base member 401). It has (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The translucency of the boundary-corresponding region is lower than the translucency of the non-boundary-corresponding region.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh or twelveth forms.
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 14th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 11th to 13th aspects.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, a second effect LED 404A) capable of causing the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to light emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 15th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment.
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is an inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light by being emitted from the entire front surface of the 405 substantially evenly forward and incident on the region corresponding to the convex portion 410.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to surface emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th aspects.
Around the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 803) and the specific member (for example, base member 801), an effect means (for example, a third effect unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. Provided (see Fig. 10-20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the effect means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, so that the electronic components are less noticeable, thus increasing the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of the form 17 is the gaming machine according to the form 16.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is provided on the player side (front side) of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to the 16th or 17th form.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (FIG. 10). -20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 19th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 16th to 18th forms.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is more visible than the color of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803). Is characterized by its high color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 16 to 19.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has light emitting means (for example, LEDs 604A and 604B for the third effect) capable of irradiating light toward the player side (see FIG. 10-21 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
A specific translucent member (for example, a cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member is further provided.
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) that transmits the light that has entered the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) has entered the specific translucent member. It is lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see FIG. 10-14).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member, so that the electronic components are less noticeable. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of the form 22 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 21.
The plate thickness of the translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the plate thickness of the specific translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the translucency of the translucent member is lowered, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 22.
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color.
The predetermined color is characterized in that it is a similar color to the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301).
According to this feature, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component or the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is performed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the starting winning opening door is in the open position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second). It is also said that the starting winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device including an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 indicates that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. , Display the screen for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body unit and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the gaming machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the gaming board 2 when the back surface side of the gaming machine 2 is visually recognized in the open state of the gaming machine frame. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the value is for the amusement park side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

(Explanation of feature units 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 with respect to the feature units 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the input circuit 91AK121, the memory controller 91AK122, the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM91AK124, the RAM91AK125, and the watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the effect control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 includes a voice decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control command received from the main board 11, thereby performing image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, and other decorations. An integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of an effect using a part or all of a plurality of effect devices such as an LED for effect and a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32 is integrated on one chip may be used. .. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 are the effect control microprocessors. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the effect data memory 91AK123 in response to the request signal supplied from the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 stores in advance the effect data that can be used to execute the effect using the effect device, such as various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 5. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data which is sprite image data which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It suffices if it is prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, or the like, and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. I just need to be there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the audio data used for the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member 32 and the like. The effect data memory 91AK123 may be any non-volatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND flash memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten. However, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device in a normal use state in which the progress of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores a computer program for effect control, fixed data, and the like. The RAM 91AK 125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time elapses after the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout that becomes a time-lapse signal. Generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. When the timeout signal is generated, the CPU 91AK131 is reset, and the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 is restarted.

In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 91AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the ROM 91AK 124, the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for performing various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data. A part or all of the effect control pattern and the effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of instructions in which a series of transfer instructions to be executed by VDP91AK132 are described according to the order of image processing and the like. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the effect using such a display list, it is sufficient that the electric components for the effect can be controlled in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used for controlling electrical components for production. The CPU 91AK131 may be able to read the program or data stored in the RAM 91AK 125 in a reading time shorter than the reading time of the program or data stored in the ROM 91AK 124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric components according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124. The effect control processing includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU 91AK 131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK 124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU 91AK 131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK 125 and temporarily stores them, and various types in which the CPU 91AK 131 is temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK 125. The variable data read process for reading the variable data, the reception process for the CPU 91AK131 to receive various signals from the outside, the transmission process for the CPU 91AK131 to output various signals to the outside, or a part or all of these processes. May be good.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP91AK 132 controls for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction unit (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, the display control instruction group included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The voice control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 inputs the moving image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and outputs the video data and the audio data separately. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and outputs the data. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read the compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode the character image data, and then supply the character image renderer 91AK145 or the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, brightness, or a part or all of the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. You may. The character image renderer 91AK145 is input with character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and is written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the character image renderer 91AK145 executes an image conversion process for displaying the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. In the text image renderer 91AK146, text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 are input, and are written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in the vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the text image data in the VRAM 91AK147. Even if the text image renderer 91AK146 executes an image conversion process for displaying the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132. The VRAM 91AK147 may be provided with, for example, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, a CG buffer, and the like. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display colors of characters and texts are defined when the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is executed, and temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK 147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK 147, such as the built-in memory 91AK 136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster) created by VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. Data) etc. In the frame buffer, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are stored. The virtual display area to be used may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. As a result, the data may be output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored. The display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored in the image drawing area. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Each time the V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). The drawing process is performed, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The voice processing circuit 91AK133 generates a voice signal that enables voice output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The voice decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded voice data to generate a voice signal. Further, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123 or ROM91AK124. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 may generate a voice signal by decompressing and decoding the voice data read from the voice data memory based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132, and outputs the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for production such as a movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP132, and outputs the motor control data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used for controlling the progress of the effect.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example of the storage area for effect control according to the stored contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, the built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of them. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores the effect control program and the effect control management data, and functions as a management area for the effect control program and the like. For example, table data, which is configuration data of various tables prepared by CPU 91AK131 of the microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting an effect control pattern, and the like are stored as management data in a storage area. It suffices if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a management area for display control programs and the like. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table in which a procedure for displaying the effect image, etc. are defined are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. I just need to be there. The image processing program may include a program that converts image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program that generates a text image in a bitmap format based on the text described using the character code and the font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image-related data including moving image data and related data. For the moving image data, image compression information including a reference image and a predicted image is generated by compression coding processing such as motion compensation prediction coding using a multi-frame image as an original image, and is multiplexed with audio data. It may be a multi-encoded stream. The moving image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is a mode and a form when the moving image is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and the display layout of the moving image. The table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image-related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be any still image data in which an arbitrary character image showing a plurality of types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and a data file constituting the character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is a mode and form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image-related data including text image data and its related data. The text image-related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect contours for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image-related data may include vector font data or stroke font data in place of the outline font data or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line or curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. .. Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is scaled up or down. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, and is an arbitrarily set word such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of a part or all of them. Any unit may be used as long as it can recognize the unit of. Further, the text image data may indicate a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, or the like. It may indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data may be stored in either the ROM 91AK 124 or the built-in memory 91AK 136 because the VDP 91AK 132 is used when executing the image processing program. As described above, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123 and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in a part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 13 may include table data and a data file constituting the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is a mode and form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores voice-related data including voice data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 can be reproduced and output as the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses, unlike the audio that is reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the effect of the moving image display. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 14 may include table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table. The voice output process table is used for voice control processing in which the sound effects such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the elapsed time as the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files constituting the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as the effect control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes, for example, conversion processing of video data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of a moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the moving image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. When the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes, for example, a conversion process of text image data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of the text image, and writes the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147 and stores it. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled by using the text image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and the text display process table according to the reach effect content. In the reach effect of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect of displaying the moving image is executed and the period in which the effect of displaying the text image is executed may be partly or wholly the same period or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined, for example.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, the moving image data is determined to be one of 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 according to the reach effect content, and is determined to be one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12. Will be done. Of these, the moving image data is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with the reach effect content. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, in the text display process table, there are cases where it is possible to determine in common even with different reach effect contents, and there are cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", it cannot be determined. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", it cannot be determined. As described above, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach B is executed.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. It can be displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD02 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD12. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used corresponding to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach of SP reach A. A configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the effect is shown. FIG. 8-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a text image designation information and a text display setting information set in association with each other in a single text display period. For the text display period, a start time for starting the display and an end time for ending the display are specified for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image in the reach effect, or by using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. You may. However, if the display content of the text image is highly relevant to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time in the text display period will be used using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. It is desirable to specify. Since the elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the reach mode, the moving image even if it is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the reach mode. The timing at which the display of is started may be different. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time in the text display period are specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing. The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the interlocking between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information specifies the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses an arbitrary character code such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.), and the content of the text image to be displayed. May be the information that identifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies that the display mode of the text image can be set by the display style information, the display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set as long as the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. .. FIG. 8-5 (B) shows a display control example in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at the timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the timing T10 is used. At some point, the display of the moving image is started.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. The timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by. The timing T08 is a timing that arrives after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly in common. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, a part of the first text display period is common to the second text display period, and a part of the other period is common to the third text display period. As described above, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, in the second text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period, and in the third text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period. As described above, the second text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period, and the third text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. As described above, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may include the entire period in the second text display period, and the second text display period may include the entire period in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. This makes it possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, as the third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such a setting, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. .. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated for the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image designation information is displayed on the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is such that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed depending on the determination result of the text display process table. It will be possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and the text is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. Image designation information 91 The text image designated by AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed is different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods, so that the text image can be displayed. The components can be changed. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed may be different in the entire plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, if the start time, end time, and part or all of the period length are different for multiple text display periods, depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You may let me. In this way, a part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to the moving image of 1 may be changed, or a part or all of the text image added to the moving image of 1 can be changed. May be.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 in the text display period from the timing T13 to the timing T14. Is displayed. The timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. After the timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T16 to the timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T18 to the timing T19. Display the text image specified by.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of the text display setting information. The text display setting information is configured to include data corresponding to a plurality of fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. In the fontFamily field, the font family that is the font type can be set for the font of the characters included in the text image. In the fontSize field, you can set the font size that is the size to display the text image. The fontWeight field allows you to set the thickness of the characters contained in the text image. In the color field, the display color of the characters included in the text image can be set. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in text images such as standard, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters contained in a text image, such as right-justified, centered, and left-justified. The textDecoration field can be set to display decorations added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Can be displayed on. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. It is displayed with the displayed display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 was set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05 is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 as the third text display period included in the first text display period. When the text image is displayed with the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and when the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed with the text display setting information 91AKA13. Or may be displayed in the display layout. With such a setting, in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the designated information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA02. On the other hand, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated by being added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed with the displayed display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB02 It can be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB03 It may be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is set to display the text, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. It may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the information 91AKB13. As described above, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is used. In addition to displaying in one display mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to a second display mode different from the first display mode and displayed. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. In addition to displaying, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode and displayed. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition to displaying in a mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, a part of the text image can be changed to a display mode different from that of the other text images and displayed. Further, after displaying the text image of the second display mode together with the text image of the first display mode, the text image of the second display mode is changed to the text image of the third display mode and displayed, and the second display. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image designated by the designated information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA01. Further, in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. As a result, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Display it. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Thereby, different text images can be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display it. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data based on the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Let me. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least a part of the text image designation information and the text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information. , Part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from # FF0040 to # 4000FF by the color field. The text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2) display text in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image of the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. For example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changed depending on the reach effect content or the like even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. .. In this case, whether or not to change the display color of the text image at a different rate depending on whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, for example, whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK131 even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that the increase in data capacity and the increase in processing load can be prevented. , Various text images can be displayed. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image is easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image is difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by, for example, the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than that when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to. This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to see while suppressing the player's discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an execution example of an effect in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, the text image is displayed according to a plurality of text display periods in accordance with the moving image display when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. In the reach effect of SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the moving image is displayed. A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a production display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete with each other is performed, for example, the battle result is Until the timing of notification, the contents of the common effect display may be used. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is high. Will be higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKAD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) is an effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponds to the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text image designation information 91AKA01. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates (300, 30) as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. A typeface whose font family is classified into Gothic typeface called AA_gothic, font size is 48px, bold line width corresponding to bold character thickness, text image display color gradually changes from # FF0040 to # 4000FF, The components in the text image display are controlled so that the background display color is # CCF0F0, the font style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the font alignment is centered, and the font decoration is unset. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes an image conversion process for displaying a text image in a display mode including a display style and a display layout specified by the text display designation information. good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image is the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display mode set by. In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins ..." specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 has a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA02, for example, the origin coordinate is (250,600). ), Font family is BB_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 36px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is #FFFFFF, background display color is # 220C0C , The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the normal font corresponding to the normal character style, the character arrangement is left-justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance !!" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB03. Typeface classified into Gothic typeface called CC_gothic, font size is 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is # 000000, background display color is #FFFFFF, character style is normal The components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal font, character placement is centered, and character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has a font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. The color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed, a part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. ..

The effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "super hot" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. Typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 72px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, text image display color is gold corresponding to "gold", background display color is # 000000, The components in the text image are controlled so that the character style is the normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is the center, and the character decoration is the effect display setting for golden display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, etc. The character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed are individually set among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all the settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed, all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, when changing and displaying 1 data among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, 1 data is displayed. Other data associated in advance may also be modified and displayed. For example, when the display color of the text image is changed to the gold color corresponding to "gold" and displayed, it is sufficient that the character decoration can be changed to the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold and displayed.

As for the display color and background display color of the text image, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, the brightness (gradation) is any one of "0" to "255". It can be set in 256 steps so that it becomes a level. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field has a data format common to the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying the character image, for example. I just need to be there. Further, the origin coordinates when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a data format common to the field data constituting the origin field in, for example, the character display setting information. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common data with the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed by using the information common to the effect image different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be any unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Further, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, the character size may be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is different from the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, by using unique information that is not used in the effect image different from the text image. May be good. As a result, it is possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display various text images.

When, for example, a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration becomes the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold. When "gold" is set by the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set by the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and display gold around the text image. It is possible to add an effect image for display. In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when a specific text image indicating a line of "super hot" is specified by the text image designation information 91A13, the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style of, a specific text image showing the line "super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. .. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect of the moving image display using the moving image data is executed, the player can easily recognize the effect content by adding the effect of the text image display using the text image data. As a result, it becomes easier to provide information that is different from the content of the production. In this case, in the data configuration in which the text image data is compressed, encoded, and multiplexed as the video data included in the moving image data, the contour is displayed in the text image display using the text image data that has been decompressed and decoded and reproduced. May cause problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality. Further, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It will be easier. When a special compression coding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In the feature units 91AK and 92AK, when the effect of moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily display various text images and execute them with high quality, and it becomes easy for the player to recognize the contents of the production. In addition, since the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data stored separately from the moving image data is added, the data capacity of the moving image data increases and the processing load of the image data increases. , Appropriate display control that can be prevented as much as possible becomes possible.

The text image display added to the moving image display using the moving image data is controlled by using the text display process table. Similarly, the moving image display is controlled using the moving image display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as the second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for this purpose. As a result, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component are changed according to the elapsed time and the like. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to the moving image of 1, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the data capacity and processing load can be increased. Appropriate display control is possible so that growth is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 was used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 was executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is displayed when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, to a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding a text image using common data to multiple moving images and making it possible to display, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the increase in data capacity and processing load is prevented. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images indicating the line "super hot" are provided by the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. The display style and the like may be changed and displayed at the timing of. A text image showing the line "super hot" corresponds to a specific first component group, for example, a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high rate of becoming a "big hit". It may be a text image. In this way, when displaying the specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is set. In the display period, the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. As the display style of the text image common to the text display period up to timing T04 and timing T05, the font family is classified into the Mincho typeface of DD_mincho by the fontFamily field, and the font size is 72px by the fontSize field. It is set.

FIG. 8-8 (A) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 8-8 (B) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed by, for example, a gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8 (C) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. Will be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the text decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the outline in the text image It is possible to add an effect image around the text image and display it by displaying the display color of or shadow, the boundary display by bevel or embossing, the layer style that adds brilliance, or a combination of some or all of them. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, by adding an effect image around the text image and displaying it, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the golden display, and the game for displaying the text image. It is possible to enhance the impression of a person.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins ...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 displays a part of the text image "character" in the text information indicating the line "If this character wins ..." with a display color and background display of the text image different from the other parts. You can set the color and character style.

FIG. 8-9 shows a display example in which a part of the text image has a display style different from that of the other parts. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed so that the display color is white, the background display color is black, and the character style is italic, and the other part of the text image is displayed in black. Display so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. In the text display setting information 91AKB02, the display color of the text image corresponds to #FFFFFF by the color field, and the background display color corresponds to black by the backgroundColor field, corresponding to a part of the text image called "character". The fontStyle field sets the italics whose character style corresponds to italic. Further, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to the other part of the text image, the display color of the text image is black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, the background display color is white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field is used. Set the normal font whose character style corresponds to normal. As a result, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced by displaying a part of the text image in a display style different from that of the other parts.

In the display of a text image constituting a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a part to be displayed in a display style different from other parts may be changed according to the progress of the effect by the moving image display. For example, when a musical piece is played or a dialogue is played back along with a moving image display, a part of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from other parts such as a specific color display or a highlight display. You may let me. The display style may be changed so that a part of the text image is faded in or faded out according to the situation in which the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses. A part of the text image to be displayed in a display style different from other parts is changed according to the elapsed time in arbitrary production execution, not limited to the situation where the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part to be displayed in a display style different from the other parts is changed according to the progress of the effect, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component, the display mode of the text image as the second component, the elapsed time, etc. One of the display control that can be changed according to the display and the display control that can be displayed by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images is executed. And the other may not be executed. As the first component and the second component related to the text image, any component may be changed with respect to the display content and display mode of the text image, for example. It is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image in place of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image. You may. For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying a text image in an enlarged or reduced manner, and these enlargement and reduction ratios according to the elapsed time. It suffices if any component that can be set with respect to the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio and the reduction ratio and the amount of change, can be changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the one that changes the display mode of the text image is the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A). It is not limited to those that change the display color, and any display style, display layout, and other display modes may be changed. For example, in the corresponding text display period, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is replaced with the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image, the origin coordinates, the font family, and the like. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, and a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be capable of changing the display mode different from the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. ..

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. Text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as grass type and writing style, is multiplexed or compressed and encoded as part of the moving image data, and the video data separated from the moving image data is decompressed. A text image of a specific aspect may be displayed by decoding or the like. In this case, the data relating to the text image of the specific aspect is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. As described above, the data related to the text image includes the specific text image-related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11 and the normal text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. You may.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table is composed of field data corresponding to a part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using the font data. , The corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, since the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data related to the text display setting, for example, textSize.

As the scalable font data such as the outline font data and the vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13, only the data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared, for example, general-purpose Japan. Data corresponding to a text image, such as word font data, which is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when the amount of the text image used in the display effect is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to a text image not limited to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused. It is possible to reduce the burden, and it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As the second component related to the text image, the specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at a plurality of timings is not limited to the text image showing the line "super hot". , Any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group may be used. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying the lyrics of a musical piece or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as a specific text image. In this way, a plurality of second components such as a display mode are provided for a specific text image corresponding to an audio effect or a display effect in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as a reproduction output of a musical piece or a reproduction display of a moving image. It may be possible to change at the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. May be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, the text image of the display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is not limited to the text image of the display content suggesting that the ratio of "big hit" is high, and suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. May be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10").

The glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold", for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any color different from metallic colors. It may include the case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be set so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed. Just do it.

When the text image is displayed in rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in characters and the display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a different display color can be changed for each in-character coordinate of the text image. , Rainbow display should be possible. For example, in the in-character coordinates of 1, the display color is changed from red to orange, then green to light blue, then blue, and then bluish-purple to magenta, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be changed in sequence. At this time, in consideration of the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted for each. The display colors in the in-character coordinates may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and magenta. After reddish purple, it is sufficient to return to red and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in the display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of the intra-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display. The display of the text image may be displayed as a rainbow as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates within the characters of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing the common display color for all the in-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the in-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed to different components depending on whether or not a specific motion of the player is detected, or a plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. It may be changed to either. The player's specific operation that makes it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A which is a V controller, and other operation rods of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary operation of tilting the push button 31b, or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. The movement of the player is not limited to what can be detected, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically change the state of the detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video type motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

In the effect of displaying a text image using text image data, a part or all of the effect may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=). 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (=). 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (= 90%). According to the setting of such a determination ratio, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect of displaying the text image according to any of the text display process patterns 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is executed. Is different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect of displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed. The ratio of image display effects is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" and the effect by displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectation is high, which is a setting value.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. Further, the arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144, and the storage data of the second storage area of the character image. A character image control means for controlling display, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. And, for example, data on a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is a character image added to one moving image. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. May be good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the in-character coordinates or the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, a moving image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, and a character image using the storage data of the second storage area. A character image control means for controlling display, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. And, for example, data on a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is, for example, a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01. For the first moving image of the above and the second moving image such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, which is different from the first moving image, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, etc. , It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, when the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1, the character image is displayed. The second component with respect to may be modifiable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the in-character coordinates or the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
The configuration relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration relating to the feature portion 60AK and the like. For example, the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and the first component is in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component may be changed, and for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image, a character image using data related to a common character image is used. It may be additionally displayable.

(Explanation of feature parts 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature units 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, an active display area 01AKA1, a first hold display area 01AKB1, a second hold display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. In the first hold display area 01AKB1, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held according to the number of the first hold storages. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held, according to the number of second hold storages. As described above, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first hold display area 01AKAB1, and the second hold display area 01AKAB2, active display and hold display which are specific displays based on the information related to the variable display are possible. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as "second hold display".

In the first hold display area 01AKB1, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the right end, and the first hold display is right-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the left end, and the second hold display is left-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the active display area 01AKA1, the active display corresponding to the first hold display erased (digested) in the first hold display area 01AKAB1 is started in response to the start of the first special figure game, and the second special figure game Corresponding to the start, the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first hold display and the second hold display. For example, the active display is the same as the first hold display and the second hold display. The effect image of may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, by displaying an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display, the active display may be recognized separately from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, the variable display of the small symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small pattern is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the decorative pattern is common. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative symbol includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small symbol corresponds to the same symbol number as the part showing the number included in the decorative symbol. Since it is an image showing the numbers and does not include a part showing a character, it suffices if a small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than an effect image showing a decorative symbol. By displaying the small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is sufficient to prevent the display contents and display results of the small symbols from being misidentified by the player. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small symbol as the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and the confirmed small symbol as the display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of a drawing command for an effect. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as drawing commands for a plurality of effects. The command 01AKG01 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by bilinear sampling is instructed. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command in which a color blend that inverts color information is instructed. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command in which color blending for blurring by changing the magnification is instructed. The command 01AKG04 is a drawing command in which a color blend for monochrome conversion is instructed. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by rotation is instructed. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructed to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for the effect may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a command group for performing drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK 131 as a command sequence in which a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK 132 are combined. In VDP91AK132, the drawing process can be executed in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for an effect may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculation. For example, in a drawing command in which color blending is instructed, it may be possible to function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, in the internal register of VDP91AK132, control data for specifying an operation target included in the display list, numerical data for specifying parameters, and other register values are stored, and register values corresponding to execution commands are stored. Drawing according to the display list starts.

When color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling is executed in response to the command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated by, for example, texture mapping of a bilinear interpolation method for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a composite reduced image is generated by executing a compositing process by color blending, for example, alpha blending. After that, by executing the enlargement processing of the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain the blurred image.

When executing a color blend that inverts the color information in response to the command 01AKG02, for example, the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, is set to the maximum value (for example, 255). Executes the difference calculation process of. For example, when the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80 = 175. For the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information included in the image data is included in the image data so that the image becomes an inverted image by executing the same difference calculation process. Can be changed to draw the generated image.

When executing a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification in response to the command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on the image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as an enlargement ratio and a reduction ratio of the image are generated. For example, for an image having a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images such as an image having a display magnification of 102% and an image having a display magnification of 104% are generated. Blur processing is performed by performing a composition process by color blending, for example, alpha blending, using the plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain the resulting image.

When executing a color blend for monochrome conversion in response to the command 01AKG04, for example, the monochrome conversion calculation process is executed for each pixel for the RGB value which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) indicated by the image data. do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB value into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion calculation process in this way, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is monochrome-converted.

When executing color blending for blurring by rotation corresponding to the command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on the image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images having different rotation angles of the images are generated. For example, for an image having a rotation angle of 0 °, two types of rotation images such as an image having a rotation angle of 2 ° and an image having a rotation angle of 4 ° are generated. An image that has been blurred by performing a color blending composition process such as alpha blending using the plurality of rotated images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to be.

When changing the offset amount of the image position corresponding to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, a coordinate value conversion process for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, the position information when drawing an image, such as a UV coordinate value, is changed according to the offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the image has a different texture arrangement.

As described above, the effect drawing command may include a command such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that changes the color information included in the image data to enable drawing of the generated image. Further, the effect drawing command may include a command such as command 01AKG06 that changes the position information corresponding to the image data to enable drawing of the generated image. In addition, the drawing command for the effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw the generated image by changing arbitrary attribute information related to the image data.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing the composition process by color blending.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for the effect image. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Of these, layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and an effect image or the like showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 is drawn so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having a display priority next to that of the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display so as to be displayable. Further, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having a display priority next to that of the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect during reach so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays an effect image showing decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Draw as much as possible. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer having the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image or the like as a background image so that it can be displayed.

The display layer on which a plurality of effect images are arranged is specified by, for example, display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect image arranged on each display layer is specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, 01AKL1. May be good. Further, for example, in the image data of the effect images drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, a Z value which is a depth value used when each effect image is superimposed and drawn may be set. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as a Z value is arranged on the front side (front side) in the Z-axis direction as compared with a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value, and the display priority of an image is high. You can do it like this.

The VDP91AK132 may determine the display priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the large value as the Z value is assigned, and is seen by the player. It can be placed on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value as the Z value is assigned has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned. It can be placed on the back side (rear side). The relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be the opposite, and the display layer to which a large value as the Z value is assigned is Z more than the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the drawing process of the effect image according to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including the plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are superposed and combined as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the effect image can be drawn and displayed by a drawing process different from the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect drawing composition processing executed by VDP91AK132. The effect drawing composition process is executed when, for example, a display list including an effect drawing command is transferred based on the decoding result of the instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of VDP91AK132. When the effect drawing composition processing is started, the image data to be the target of the effect processing is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK 132, the image data to be processed is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, and temporarily stored. The data transfer circuit of VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the buffer area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or VRAM91AK147 by accessing the image data address specified by the drawing command, and transfers the image data to the work area of VRAM91AK147. And memorize it. As the image data to be processed by the effect, image data indicating an image to be drawn on any one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, is specified by a drawing command among a plurality of display layers.

After that, the effect color blend is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, VDP91AK132 may execute any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. Color blending may be performed according to the above. In the case of the command 01AKG06, the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position in the texture mapping may be executed.

After step 01AKS02, the images are combined and drawn corresponding to the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image obtained by performing the effect color blending in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 is drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing the effect color blend. can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn corresponding to the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP 91AK 132, the image data to be drawn is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer by step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses the VRAM91AK147 for screen display. It may be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 are drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As the image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04, image data indicating an image to be drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, is specified by a drawing command by a drawing command. As a result, the image drawn on either of the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 is drawn for screen display without executing the effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data. Can be done.

As described above, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute the drawing process for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 by using the image data stored in the predetermined area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or the VRAM 91AK147. Further, by executing the effect drawing composition process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information included in the image data and draw the image drawn on any one of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which is a specific layer. On the other hand, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When the display list including the normal display drawing command is transferred without including the effect drawing command, the VDP91AK132 can execute the normal drawing composition process different from the effect drawing composition process. In the normal drawing composition process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and causes the VRAM91AK147 to read the image data to be drawn. Then, it may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 are drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. In this case, for the image drawn on any of the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 and the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, the color information of the image data and the like are changed without executing the effect color blend. It can be drawn for screen display without.

FIG. 9-5 shows an execution example of image processing by the effect drawing composition processing. In this case, in the display list including the drawing command for the effect, as the image data to be processed by the effect, the image data 01AKD03 and the layer of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer. The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 are designated, respectively. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing / compositing process, the VDP91AK132 stores the image data in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 or the like and temporarily stores the image data. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4, and the effect arranged on the layer 01AKL5. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP91AK132 executes the effect color blending on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing composition processing. For example, when a color blend to be converted to monochrome is specified by the command 01AKG04 as a drawing command for an effect, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

After that, the VDP91AK132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low priority display layer by step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing composition processing. For example, the image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written to the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 and stored in order from the display layer having the lowest display priority. At this time, the image data may be overwritten or the hidden surface may be erased according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Remember with. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read second, superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, superimposed on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized.

Then, the VDP91AKD132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the display layer having a high priority by the effect drawing composition processing step 91AKS04. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first specified as the image data to be drawn among the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer. , The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is designated next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data, the VDP91AK132 writes and stores the image data in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is read first and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out, superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted into image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 whose color information is changed by the effect color blend, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 has priority for display. The data is written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the degree. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not executing the effect color blend. Therefore, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, various production images such as a background image, a production image showing a decorative pattern, and a production image for increasing the chance during reach are displayed by drawing by a specific drawing process such as an effect color blend. It is possible. On the other hand, in 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, drawing is performed by a normal drawing process that does not perform color blending for effects, and the effect image showing a hold display or an active display, an effect image showing a small pattern, and the like can be used for the progress of the game. It is possible to display a related predetermined image.

FIG. 9-6 shows an image display example by executing the effect drawing composition processing. The VDP91AK132 can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing composition process when the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred. ..

FIG. 9-6 (A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process among the effect color blends is displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are drawn by a monochrome conversion calculation process or the like in which the number of colors is smaller than the color information included in the image data as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display a production image. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to draw a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-6 (B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG02 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the difference calculation process among the effect color blends can be displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Is. The difference calculation process is a process for converting and drawing a value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data is converted and drawn by the difference calculation process or the like to draw the image for production. Can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed by drawing without converting the value of the color information included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

In addition, when the display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, are subjected to the compositing process of performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG03 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the image data by the compositing process of performing the color blending for blurring by changing the magnification as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG05 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, are converted into the image data by the compositing process of performing the color blending for blurring by rotation as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG06 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the image data by the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information corresponding to the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data and the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data can be displayed on a specific layer. Can be displayed. As a result, even if the production image is drawn using common image data, different image processing can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the color information or the position information is changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

FIG. 9-7 (A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the reach effect content. The jackpot reliability for each reach effect is the ratio of the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state in the case where each reach effect is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different according to the reach effects of a plurality of types of super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern. I just need to be there.

SP reach A1 to A3 are reach productions of super reach having a lower jackpot reliability than SP reach B, and are also called "weak SP reach". SP reach B is a reach production of super reach with higher jackpot reliability than SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. Is. Therefore, when the reach effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" only once in five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect content may include an effect mode in which a part of the reach can recognize the commonality. For example, in the SP reach A1 to A3, moving images common to each other may be reproduced and displayed as background images. Alternatively, in SP reach A1 to A3, a common character image may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, in SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP reach B, a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference from the other cases can be recognized in any one of the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, in the SP reach A1 to A3, moving images different from each other may be reproduced and displayed as background images. Alternatively, in the SP reach A1 to A3, character images different from each other may be displayed in animation. In addition, the effect mode in which the difference can be recognized is an arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, an arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an arbitrary light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED. It may be the light emission of the above, an arbitrary operation using the movable member for effect, or a combination of a part or all of them.

When a reach effect that becomes a super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command may be selected and executed. As a drawing effect, the image drawn according to the effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display the image drawn according to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if a case is included in which an effect by displaying an image drawn only in response to a normal display drawing command is executed without executing a specific drawing effect. good.

FIG. 9-7 (B) shows a setting example of the drawing effect content according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, as a plurality of drawing effect patterns, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are prepared in advance. A part or all of the drawing effect contents is different depending on the plurality of drawing effect patterns. The contents of the drawing effect include the presence / absence and type of the drawing effect by the effect display and the presence / absence of the drawing effect by the strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include an effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. Drawing effects by effect display and strobe display are also called specific drawing effects.

The effect display is an effect display in which the color information included in the image data is changed and drawn when the drawing command for the effect is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include monochrome conversion effect and color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses the command 01AKG04 among the drawing commands for the effect to draw and display the effect image subjected to the monochrome conversion. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image in which the color information is inverted. As described above, the effect display may be any effect as long as it can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. As for the effect display, for example, the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data may be displayed by using the command 01AKG06 among the drawing commands for the effect.

The strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single color (for example, black or white) image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed for each predetermined number of frames. Is. The strobe display may be executed for an image drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, the strobe display may not be executed for the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 which are special layers. As described above, while the strobe display can be executed in the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, there may be a limitation as a limit that the strobe display is not executed in the range of the image drawn on the special layer. In addition to the strobe display, a pause display may be displayed. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. In addition, when the strobe display is not executed, the pause display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process process of step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawings are drawn at a ratio corresponding to the variable display result and the reach effect content as shown in FIG. 9-8. It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random number value, according to the variable display result and the reach effect content, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-8, when the variable display result is "missing" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing is performed at a ratio of 60% (= 60/100). The effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKAB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and 5% (= 5). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined at the ratio of / 100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at the ratio of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at the ratio of 5% = (5/100). Will be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (= 5/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKA2 is determined at a rate of 15% (= 15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (= 30/100). Due to such a determination ratio, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the ratio controlled to the big hit game state is different.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern that does not execute a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect by effect display or strobe display. On the other hand, the drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of the effect display and the strobe display. Then, among the cases where the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is "big hit", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". The ratio of drawing effect patterns other than the above is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the specific drawing effect which is the drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is executed, the specific drawing effect is not executed as compared with the case where the specific drawing effect is not executed. , The variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. Further, in the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the determination ratio is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

When the reach effect content is SP reach B, it is possible to determine only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and a restriction is provided so that it is not determined other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach A1 to A3, is executed. In such a case, if the specific drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, which may reduce the game interest. be. Therefore, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit as a limit that the specific drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being hindered by the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game entertainment.

When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it can be determined to be one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKAB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display result. .. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. In this way, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is increased by executing the specific drawing effect, so that the jackpot reliability is low. Even in the case of the reach effect of, the player's expectation can be raised by executing the specific drawing effect, and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

Even when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that the specific drawing effect by the effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. May be limited as.

FIG. 9-9 (A) shows the effect execution period in the variable display of the super reach. When the variable display of the super reach is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as the effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of the execution of the reach effect after the reach is established. The effect execution period D1 is a period from the start of the reach effect execution period in which the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed to the start of the chance up effect execution period in which the chance up effect can be executed. The effect execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period in which the result notification effect can be executed after the chance-up effect execution period ends. The result notification effect may be an effect that notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach effect that becomes the super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification effect execution period. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9 (B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period, when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE is performed. Become feasible. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed even during the effect execution period D2, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed.

Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach effect of the super reach, regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , The specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, if it is possible to execute a light emission effect using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. good. Further, in the effect execution period D0, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", or "left", "middle", and "right". When the decorative symbols that make up the pseudo-continuous chance eyes are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to carry out a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. The effect may be executable.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed during the execution of the variable display, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0. Regardless of whether or not, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is not used. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed on 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR is not executed regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. Becomes executable. In the effect execution period D3, similarly to the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. It may be. When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is normally drawn in the effect execution period D4 for confirming and notifying the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. It suffices to return to the execution of the production NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executed in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the judgment result that the reach effect of the super reach is executed as the judgment result at the time of starting winning. You may do so. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are specific layers, as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2. An image drawn by a specific drawing process can be displayed. For example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by a normal drawing process.

When the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is feasible. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, it is controlled so that the light emission effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs may be turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. As described above, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR that can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed. In the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image is executed, there is a limit as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process by not executing the light emission effect. The display can improve the game entertainment.

When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, it is not limited to the one provided with the restriction that the light emitting effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed, and for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. There may be restrictions on the mode of effect of the light emission effect, such as reducing the amount of effect of the light emission effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of light emitted (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emitting effect is reduced as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, so that the amount of effect is reduced. It may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited to be reduced by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emitting effect as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. May be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (for example, single color emission) as compared with the case where the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Such restrictions may be provided.

9-10 to 9-13 show execution examples of reach effect and drawing effect. FIG. 9-10 shows an example of effect execution when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of effect execution in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an example of effect execution in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10 (A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. At this time, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", the common decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers "7" are aligned and stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the reach is established. , The reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02 AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be appropriately executed corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it suffices if it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 9-10 (B) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM02 in the case where the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. 9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) show the effect execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the reach effect of the super reach progresses in the effect execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D1, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM05 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 9-10 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKAM05 and 02AKAM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by the effect display or the strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as the reach effect of the super reach, a reach effect in which the effect content differs depending on the variable display result is executed, and the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. Then, the fixed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern corresponding to the effect execution period D3, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 when the final notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of the super reach ends, the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-11 (A) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 11 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02 AKM05. However, the pause display may be started corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, the image drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, may be copied to the copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. In addition, it is controlled not to execute the light emission effect in response to the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by the strobe display.

FIG. 9-11 (B) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 12 when the strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 11. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM12, an image that is entirely black is drawn and displayed as a single color image on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 that are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-11 (C) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 13 in the case of executing an effect display which is a pause display during the strobe display, following the effect execution example 02 AKM 12. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during the strobe display by repeating the pause display started in the effect execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to layer 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing an image read from the copy area of VRAM91AK147, the same image pause as in the effect execution example 02AKM11 may be paused and displayed repeatedly.

FIG. 9-11 (D) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 14 in which the same image as the effect execution example 02 AKM 12 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 13. FIG. 9-11 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 15 in which the same images as those of the effect execution examples 02 AKM 11 and 02 AKM 13 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 14. FIG. 9-11 (F) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 16 in which the same images as those of the effect execution examples 02 AKM 12 and 02 AKM 14 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 15. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which the same images as those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16, following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying the image drawn using the image data and the image of a single color having a setting different from the image data, the strobe display and the pause display can be performed. .. After the strobe display of the effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is returned to the execution, and the light emission effect is controlled to be executed.

Such a strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to the drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed according to the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be used by the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

In FIG. 9-12 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. The production execution example 02 AKM21 is shown. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the image drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, is displayed in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. is doing.

FIG. 9-12 (B) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 22 when the strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 21. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM22, similarly to the effect execution example 02AKM12 and the like, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image of black as a whole as a single color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which a specific drawing effect SPE by a monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach, following the effect execution example 02AKM22. Is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02 AKM23, it suffices if the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02 AKM 21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12 (D) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 24 in which the same image as the effect execution example 02 AKM 22 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 23. FIG. 9-12 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 25 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the images drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, are displayed in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. is doing.

FIG. 9-12 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24, following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 27 when the reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient that the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26, following the effect execution example 02AKM27. In this way, the image by monochrome conversion drawn by reducing the number of colors of the color information by the monochrome conversion calculation processing using the image data and the image of a single color by the setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, is a dedicated image using an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for the effect transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be made different, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display effect is prevented while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the game entertainment.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed. The production execution example 02AKM31 to be performed is shown. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by the differential calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (B) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 32 when the strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 31. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22 and the like, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image of black as a whole as a single color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-13 (C) shows an effect execution example in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows 02AKM33. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it suffices if the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. , The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13 (D) shows the effect execution example 02AKM34 that repeatedly displays the same image as the effect execution example 02AKM32, following the effect execution example 02AKM33. FIG. 9-13 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 35 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 34. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by the differential calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 37 when a reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 36. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient that the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image by color information inversion drawn by converting the value of the color information by the difference calculation process using the image data and the image of a single color by the setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information inversion effect, is dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the value of the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for the effect transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is feasible regardless. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. Since it is possible to give different impressions to the player, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display is displayed while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the production and improve the game entertainment.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by the effect display or the strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed, while the reach effect is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state becomes high, so that the player's expectation can be raised and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

The invention relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature units 01AK and 02AK, and has the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image having a setting different from the image data. In such a strobe display, a part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance and displayed. For example, when an effect image to be a character image is inserted and displayed as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to a big hit game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and the determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

It has been described that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display unit of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmission is provided on the front side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Further, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided in the vicinity of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Therefore, a light emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in response to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient that the light emission display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient to control so that the light emission display effect is not executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing the button light emitting unit mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, it is sufficient that the button light emission effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emission effect pattern or the like during the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, it may be controlled not to execute the button light emission effect during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the layer 01AKL2 that draws the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display so as to be displayable may be included in a specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting where the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, so that color information or the like can be obtained. May be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display may be changed to a monochrome image having a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling monochrome display of such hold display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display related to variable display such as hold display and active display, the specific drawing effect SPE If the change effect is executed during the execution of, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state. When the change effect includes a success pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE. When the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the hold display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the hold display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer for drawing an effect image showing the launch direction of the game ball so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect that is a left-handed effect or a right-handed effect, when a launch promotion effect is executed, an effect image that encourages the game ball to be fired toward the left game area or the right game area is displayed. It suffices if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game can be played by firing a game ball as a game medium, and a first path and a second path are provided as movement paths through which the game ball can flow down. The first route may be a right-handed route which is a right-handed game area in the game area, and the second route may be a left-handed area which is a left-handed game area in the game area. Then, when it is the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the first path, the first promotion image for prompting the launch of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. Anything is fine. In addition, when the second state is in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the second path, a second promotion image for prompting the launch of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is displayed. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the direction is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the effect image prompting the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed in a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display an image that encourages the launch of the game medium by a normal drawing process instead of a specific drawing process, various display effects are executed while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that encourages the launch of the game medium. Then, the game entertainment can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, an effect image indicating that the effect output amount can be changed, such as volume, screen brightness, and a part or all of the light emission amount, may be drawn and displayed. As the display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer for drawing an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so as to be displayable may be included.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, detection by various sensors such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door opening sensor, a grand prize opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball burnout sensor connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start port switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the generated error is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer having the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, various display effects can be achieved while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality. It can be executed to improve the game entertainment. In the case of notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which the light emission effect is not executed, the light emission notification at the time of abnormality may be executed by causing the light emitting member to emit light. In this way, the notification regarding the occurrence of the abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer for drawing the effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the suggestion display layer, it is sufficient that the setting suggestion images determined at different ratios can be drawn and displayed according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the set value, whether or not to execute the pachinko machine and the effect mode are set according to the set value. It suffices if the setting suggestion effect having a different determination ratio can be executed. For example, one of a plurality of setting suggestion images may be selected at a different ratio depending on the setting value, and the selected setting suggestion image may be drawn and displayed on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is made. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. An image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process instead of a specific drawing process, so that an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player can be displayed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is suggested. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. By making it possible to draw and display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer by a specific drawing process, the display of an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player is diversified. , The game entertainment can be improved.

At least some of the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of applying to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the assist time (also referred to as AT) which is the notification period in which the navigation notification for notifying the stop order which is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result can be executed. , As the navigation notification, an effect image for notifying the stop order in an identifiable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, as the display layer included in the special layer, a notification display layer that draws an effect image used for navigation notification so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the notification display layer, when the order of stopping the variable display by each of the left, middle, and right reels is notified, if the stop order image showing the order of the stop operation by the stop switch can be drawn and displayed on the notification display layer. good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the notification is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. The visibility of the image that notifies the operation mode can be displayed by drawing the image that notifies the operation mode when the variable display in the slot machine is stopped in a special layer by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while appropriately securing the above.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 01AK)
The present embodiment includes the following inventions. That is, in a gaming machine capable of performing a game such as a pachinko gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an effect image is produced according to an instruction of a display list. A technique for tilting and deforming a pachinko machine to display a slingshot image, or a pachinko / pachislot machine for drawing a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated by using an inverted image are arranged, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29947. Was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, the visibility of an important image may be lowered because the entire image is changed. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of gaming while appropriately ensuring the visibility of images.
The game machine related to the feature unit 01AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and VRAM91AK147, and image data. An image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing is provided, and the image processing means draws in response to image data, for example, normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command for normal display, and normal drawing processing. It is possible to execute drawing by changing at least the color information included in the image data, for example, a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command for an effect. For example, a plurality of layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 having different priorities. An image in each of the layers can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include, for example, a specific layer such as layers AKL03 to AKL05 and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02. According to steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed. For example, according to step 01AKS04, the special layer is drawn by the normal drawing process and is related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity, appropriately secure the visibility of the image, enable the execution of various display effects, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion), for example, monochrome conversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn (for example, the color information is inverted), for example, the color information is inverted. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, for example, a first period (for example, the effect execution period D1) in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed, and a second period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed. Of a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the effect execution period D2), the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the first period, and the light emitting means may not be made to emit light in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, for example, a first period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed (for example, the effect execution period D1) and a second period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed (for example, the effect execution period D2). Of the plurality of periods including (such as), the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the normal mode in the first period, and the light emitting of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting value change process S6A that has different advantages for the player and can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values such as a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 for executing the setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode, for example, setting such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. Suggestion effects (for example, effects by effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting value change process S6A that has different advantages for the player and can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values such as a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode. The effect (for example, the effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, a specific effect of pausing and displaying an image (for example, a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 may be executed. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, as in the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the image drawn using the image data and the monochromatic image may be alternately displayed on the specific layer (see, for example, the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, variable display of decorative symbols in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of the decorative symbol in 5R), and reduction in a mode smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1. Variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1) can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process. It is possible, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the feature unit 02AK is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and VRAM91AK147, and image data. It is provided with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player such as a jackpot gaming state, for example, a specific effect such as a reach effect of super reach. The first pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the second pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02, which can be executed during the variable display and the ratio of the specific effect controlled to the advantageous state is different, are different. Of the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, at least in the first period such as the effect execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect. An image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to the drawing command of In the two periods, it is possible to display the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, for example, a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command at the time of a specific drawing effect. It is possible to display the image drawn by. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity and appropriately raise the expectation of the player while making it possible to execute the production by various displays, and improve the game entertainment.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn, for example, color information inversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in the specific effect, the light emission effect by the light emitting means can be executed in the normal mode in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process, and the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect can be performed. The light emission effect may be limited more than in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

It is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, for which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is given by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. The image may not be displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

It is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A and can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which the suggestion regarding the setting of the means is given by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. The image may be displayable. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second period, an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image may be alternately displayed in the case of the second pattern, for example, as in the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, variable display of identification information images such as variable display of decorative symbols in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small symbols in small symbol display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of the reduced identification information image in a mode smaller than that of the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is subjected to a specific drawing process. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configurations relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK and the configurations relating to the feature portion 60AK. For example, in the configuration in which the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, the first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component can be changed, or a character image using data related to a common character image is added to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image. In the configuration that can be displayed, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed, and the special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer is drawn by the normal drawing process. A predetermined image related to the progress of the game may be displayed, and in the second period after the first period, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the case of the first pattern. When the second pattern is different from the first pattern in the ratio controlled in an advantageous state, the image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed.

(Explanation of feature 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as the feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as the feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine as a feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be described with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. Further, the same parts as those in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 includes a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) for supporting and fixing the game board 2. It is also called the underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or a methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. , The board surface plate 200 provided with the guide rail 211, the outer rail decoration 212, and the like, and the spacer member 201 integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate 200. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 211, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

An opening 2c is formed in the board surface plate 200 and the spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side is passed through the opening 2c on the player side. It can be visually recognized from (front side). Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, the area overlapping the board surface plate 200 is visible through the board surface plate 200.

A center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the flow area of the game ball in the game area Y. Has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

The first effect unit 300 is provided at the lower position on the back side of the board surface plate 200, that is, at the lower position on the image display device 5. The second effect unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third effect unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5. The fourth effect unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board plate 200, that is, at the position on the upper left side of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right position of the board surface plate 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 capable of winning a game ball flowing down the game area Y is provided.

Since the first effect unit 300 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board surface plate 200, they can be seen through the board surface plate 200 from the player side (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface whose front surface is the front surface of the board surface plate 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device device. It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). Is. Here, in order to help understanding, the light emitting region 506 is indicated by dots (halftone dots), and the non-light emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is indicated by white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right side and the lower area. A collection of LED substrates 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 for incident light on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 and light from the light guide plate LED 502 are collected toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 or the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member formed of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-rear width dimension (plate thickness = about 5 mm), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the light guide plate 501 is a plate member. It is arranged in front of the third effect unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

Further, the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, , A light emitting region (see the halftone dot region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)) that emits light due to light incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and the inside from the right end surface 501a. The non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front, that is, does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. It has a non-light emitting region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a graphic whose peripheral edge is radial appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501, and when light is incident inside the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and moves forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 501.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B) and 10-6 (C), the light emitting region 506 is in a fine uneven state so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a and emit it from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a concavo-convex state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when the traveling direction of light is viewed from the side. In FIG. 10-6 (C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a fine particle having a size that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in an uneven state.

When light is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (FIG. See the halftone dot region at 10-5). That is, the light emitting region 506 as the first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region in which a dot pattern is formed, and is not a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits light from the front surface. The light emitting region 507 is a region in which a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the feature portion 75SG, a predetermined image (graphic) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as a pattern, a character, a symbol, a pattern, or a pattern are also included. Other display information including may be displayable.

In the light guide plate 501, when no light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting region 506 is colorless and transparent, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the first The 2 effect unit 400 and the 3rd effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (perspective) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, in the state where the light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 is maintained in a colorless and transparent state.

In the feature portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a concavo-convex state forming a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of 501. In addition, the reflective part is configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which the acrylic plate and the reflector are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a grooving method, and the like. You may.

In the feature portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is substantially a semicircular shape in a cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be variously deformed as long as it constitutes a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front (front surface), such as a substantially triangular shape.

The condenser lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction by a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are continuously formed in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LED 502.

The convex portion 504A is not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LED 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Further, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided, and a plurality of condenser lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LED 502. You may use it.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (C), the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Further, since the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. It is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines backward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condenser lens 504 is a light guide plate from the light guide plate LED 502 side. It is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines toward the front side toward the 501 side. That is, the condenser lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the gap between the gaps is such that the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even when vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. As a result, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being scratched by the vibration generated during the transportation and use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. The emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on the condenser lens 504. Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface, the incident surface is incident on the condenser lens 504 even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high. The light is diffused radially in the condensing lens 504 in the left-right direction. Then, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted to the right and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

As a result, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting region in the light guide plate 501 Can be expanded. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because the radial spread is suppressed), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be emitted. Further, the light incident on the light guide plate LED 502 from the light guide plate LED 502 is collected toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while repeating total internal reflection in the front-rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the light guide plate 504 of the light guide plate 504. It is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the portion having the smallest front-rear width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction. Since it can be guided to 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected in the light emitting region 506 toward the front side (player's side). As a result, from the player's point of view, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by reflected light, so that the region represented by halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 emits surface light on the front surface of the light guide plate 501. The figure will be displayed with.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the image display device 5 is arranged in the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged in the front when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction). From the player's point of view, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. The image display device 5 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device may be used.

(1st production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. 10-7 are a front view showing the first effect unit, and a rear view shown in FIG. 10-7. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the first effect unit is viewed diagonally from the front. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), FIG. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 10-7 (A), and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of EE of (A). 10-10 is a front view showing a base member, FIG. 10-10 is a front view showing an LED substrate, and FIG. 10C is a front view showing a cover member. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and FIG. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. 10-11 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first effect unit 300 is arranged so as to cover the base member 301 and the front surface side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N1. Mainly composed of a cover member 302 to be mounted and an LED substrate 303 attached to the front surface of the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N2, from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200.

The base member 301 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat portion 311 made of a flat surface, a horizontally long rectangular concave portion 312 formed in the lower part of the flat portion 311 and a rear wall portion 313A to be located slightly behind the flat portion 311. It has 313D and.

A plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 314A to 314E forming a part of the decorative pattern 331, which will be described later, are formed in the upper portion of the flat portion 311 in the longitudinal direction, and a rear wall is formed between the convex portions 314A to 314E. The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. The rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined rearward toward the upper side (see FIG. 10-9 (B)). Further, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED substrate 303, and is formed so as to be surrounded by the flat portion 311 in the front view. ing. Then, in the state where the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first effect LED 304, which will be described later, is located in front of the flat portion 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat dissipation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED substrate 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-9, a plurality of first effect LEDs 304 and other electronic components (not shown) capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 303. A plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10 (B)). On the other hand, on the back surface of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN and electronic components (not shown) for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 303 (insulating portion on the front surface and the back surface excluding the printed wiring 320) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material in a horizontally long shape in front view, and has a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of a flat portion 311 and a recess 312 of the base member 301. It mainly has second translucent portions 322A and 322B corresponding to the first effect LED 304. Further, at positions corresponding to the convex portions 314A to 314E of the base member 301, a plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B protrudes forward from the front surface of the first translucent portion 321, and the concave portion 322D is formed on the back surface. The LED 304 for the first effect can be accommodated. Further, a light diffusing portion 322C composed of fine uneven portions is formed on the back surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B, so that the light from the rear first effect LED 304 can be diffused and emitted forward. ing. The uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, and the like can be variously changed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 having a hexagonal front view. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 forms a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view with a decorative portion 331A composed of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction and decorative portions 331B and 331C composed of inclined lines extending in the diagonally left and diagonally right directions. A plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided by having a decorative portion 331D and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape in a front view, and by sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331. ..

Further, in each of these decorative portions 331A to 331E, for example, the back surface (or front surface) of the cover member 302 may be sandblasted to form fine uneven portions, or a translucent sticker or the like may be attached. As a result, each of the decorative portions 331A to 331E looks milky white or translucent when visually recognized from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the LED substrate 303 as an electronic component having the first effect LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side thereof is covered with the cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 through the cover member 302. be.

Here, by arranging the same black base member 301 around (periphery) the black LED substrate 303, the LED substrate 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are assimilated. The boundary part BD with is difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED substrate 303 arranged in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED substrate are attached. The cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front surface of the 303, and while it is easy for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 through the first translucent portion 321. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first effect LED 304 through the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. Further, by arranging the milky white or translucent decorative portions 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, the milky white or translucent on the front side of the black background. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, in a state where the cover member 302 is arranged on the front surface side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 of the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) Etc.) are formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. Specifically, the decorative portions 331B and 331C composed of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is two members (LEDs). Since it is provided so as to straddle the substrate 303 and the cover member 302), it looks as if one decorative pattern 331 is provided on one member, so that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side thereof It becomes difficult to recognize that is a separate member.

Further, since a part of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player side due to the decorative portions 331B and 331C overlapping on the front side, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Since the decorative portions 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap the front surface side of the boundary portion BD, the area overlapping with the boundary portion BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 covers the LED substrate 303. Since it is formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

Further, since the decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary portion BD, the mode is similar to that of the boundary portion BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish the decorative portion 331A, and the decorative portion 331A is arranged on the front side of the boundary portion BD. In addition, in the case of milky white, which has a higher brightness than black, it is conspicuous, so that the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous. By arranging the decorative portion 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be difficult to see from the player side by the decorative portion 331A.

Further, these decorative portions 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape like the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED substrate 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, whereby the printed wiring is printed. Since the wiring pattern and the mode of the 320 are similar (or common), it is difficult to distinguish them, so that the LED substrate 303 is not conspicuous.

Further, the decorative portions 331D and 331E are different in mode from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, but are more conspicuous than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD because they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD. Further, since a part of the printed wiring board 320 is arranged overlapping on the front side of the printed wiring board 320, the printed wiring board 320 becomes difficult to see, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 composed of vertically flattened hexagonal linear convex portions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the mode is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in the region of the base member 301 not covered by the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as a predetermined region that can be visually recognized from the player side without passing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are provided on the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern 331 is provided, it becomes difficult to understand that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members, and thus the LED substrate. 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED substrate 303 is arranged in the recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, the LED substrate 303 is located below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position separated from the image display device 5. Since it is provided, it is located at a position away from the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to, so that it is less noticeable.

As described above, the predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is attached to the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. By being provided so as to straddle the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED substrate 303, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side which can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13 are a front view showing a variable winning ball unit in FIG. 10-13, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 10B.

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board surface plate 200 from the front side and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701, and the variable winning ball unit 700. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrally provided as a unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the lower left. Between, the game ball path 705A in which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and the game ball (game ball) in the second starting winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED substrate 703 provided with a plurality of effect LEDs 704 capable of irradiating light toward the front is provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the game ball passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B through the cover plate 702A from the player side.

(1st production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14 are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-16 is a diagram for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side at the lower position of the image display device 5, and when visually recognized from the player side, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side. 1 The right end of the effect unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13 (B), the front portion of the variable winning ball unit 700 is arranged on the front side of the board surface plate 200, while the first effect unit 300 is the board surface plate 200. It is located on the back side of.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A) and 10-14 (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first translucent portion 321 of the first effect unit 300, is the second translucent portion 322A, 322B. It is made longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in (L1A> L1B).

In the first translucent portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light entering from the front in the direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the first transmissive portion 321, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is XA. %. Further, in the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, among the light entering from the front in the direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B, the light is transmitted in the T direction. The light transmittance is XB%. That is, not all (100%) of the light that has entered the first translucent portion 321 and the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some of the light is reflected in the front surface. , It is emitted in a direction different from the T direction (so as to spread around) at the rear. In particular, the second translucent portions 322A and 322B have a light diffusing portion 322C formed of uneven portions on the back surface, so that light is more easily transmitted in a direction different from the T direction than the first transmissive portion 321. , The transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first translucent portion 321 (transparency is low. XA%> XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (C) and 10-14 (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light entering from the front in the direction orthogonal to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y. %. Here, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the first translucent portion 321 and the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2 <L1A, L2 <L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and is hard to be diffused to the surroundings until it is emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second transmissive parts 322A and 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%).

In other words, since the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than the translucency of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion (for example, a game) on the back surface side of the cover plate 702A is passed through the cover plate 702A from the player side. Rather than visually recognizing the ball P), the case where the player sees through the cover member 302 and visually recognizes a predetermined portion (for example, the first effect LED 304 or the LED substrate 303) on the back surface side of the cover member 302. However, since the visibility is low, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the first effect unit 300, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around the LED substrate 303 have the same color (black). , The LED substrate 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front-rear dimensions L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B> L2), and the first production unit. The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of the 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%), the LED substrate 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a position (right side) different from the first effect unit 300 are visually recognized from the player side, the cover member 702 is transparent. Since the visibility when the LED substrate 303 is visually recognized through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when the game ball P is visually recognized, the variable winning ball unit 700 located in the vicinity of the first production unit 300. The LED substrate 303 arranged on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, becomes more difficult to see. Further, the cover member 302 is arranged on the back side of the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 are dark black, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around the LED substrate 303, are of the same color (black) is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. The color is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member may not be the same color, and may be, for example, similar colors or similar colors.

Color has three attributes: hue (hue), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). 2. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but are adjacent to each other in hue. 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue. Includes color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation.

Here, an example of the above "1. Combination of colors having the same tone (hue group having the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but adjacent colors on the hue (adjacent colors)" is shown in FIG. 10-16. To explain based on this, when cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), which are the three primary colors of the colorants, are arranged at an angle interval of 120 degrees in a predetermined number of hue circles (24 colors in this case). Each of the three colors is non-similar to each other. Colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in the angle of the color wheel are "similar colors" and are not limited to a combination of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the color wheel.

For example, when cyan (C) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to cyan (C). When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) become similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow (M). When Y) is used as the reference color, the color belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) is a similar color of yellow (Y). Therefore, even when the number of colors in the color wheel is less than 24 colors or 24 colors or more, a combination of colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in terms of the angle of the color wheel may be referred to as "similar colors".

In addition, similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and combinations of colors included in cold colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, and green and purple. It is preferable to include a color combination contained in a neutral color which is a chromatic color located between a warm color and a cold color.

(2nd production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17 is a front view showing the second effect unit in FIG. 10-17, and FIG. 10-17 is a front view showing the second effect unit in a state where the cover member is removed. 10-18 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). 10-19 is a diagram for explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and FIG. 10-19 is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 401, and the front surface of the base member 401. The pachinko game machine 75SG001 is mainly composed of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED substrate 403 has a substantially quadrangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a boss projecting from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second effect LEDs 404A and 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, on the back surface of the LED substrate 403, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C capable of irradiating light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D capable of irradiating light downward, and other electronic components (illustrated). (Omitted) is installed. The second effect LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 403 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 403, and is arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403 with a plurality of second effect LEDs 404A. It is arranged between a plurality of second effect LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403, and light from the second effect LED 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second effect LED 404B is incident on the front end surface. Light is incident on the rear end face.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), on the back surface of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by the reflecting portion 406 for reflecting the light incident forward. Then, the light is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed in a concavo-convex state (rough surface) in which the cross-sectional view of the light guided through the inside of the inner lens 405 in the traveling direction forms a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by a stamper or injection. For example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, or an acrylic plate and reflection. The reflective portion may be formed by a sticking dot method in which a plate is attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a grooving method, or the like.

The cover member 402 has a box shape with a back opening made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403. At a position on the front surface of the cover member 402 corresponding to the LED substrate 403, a convex portion 410 having a slightly enlarged shape of the LED substrate 403 when viewed from the front is projected forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, the decorative portion 420 composed of the letter "V" (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having translucency or a translucent sheet on which the letters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 402A formed of a concavo-convex portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410 so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the upper region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421A projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421B projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404D. It should be noted that a light diffusing portion made of uneven portions may also be formed on the back surface of the cover member 402 where the convex portions 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to incline rearward from the convex portion 410 toward the upper side and the lower side.

In the plurality of convex portions 421A and 421B, uneven portions are continuously formed on the rear end surfaces, and step portions 421C are formed at intermediate positions in the longitudinal direction, so that the convex portions 410 are directed upward and downward. By extending the light so as to incline to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second effect LEDs 404C and 404D can be received from these uneven portions and the stepped portion 421C, and also enters. The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405 and the light emitted forward by the inner lens 405 is convex on the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the LED substrate 403 as an electronic component having the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side thereof is formed by the cover member 402. It is covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is assumed that the light diffusing portion is formed on the cover member 402 in a portion other than the convex portions 421A and 421B from the player side. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 through the portions other than the convex portions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), by arranging the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 and the surrounding base member 401 Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED substrate 403, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 is a boundary between the LED substrate 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when visually recognized from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side in the portion BD. That is, since a part of the decorative portion 420 is arranged so as to hang (overlap) a part of the boundary portion BD on the front side of the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD is arranged by the decorative portion 420. By making it difficult to see, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side which can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

Further, the decorative portion 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front surface side of the boundary portion BD is larger than that of the above-mentioned decorative pattern 331, and the boundary portion BD is made difficult to see, so that the LED substrate 403 Is obscured.

In the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at positions corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side of the boundary portion BD when visually recognized from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 420 may be arranged at a position corresponding to all the portions of the boundary portion BD. It is preferable that the boundary portion BD is provided so as to overlap about 1/3 or more of the boundary portion BD.

Further, since the character "V" is displayed as the logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH" are used. , Etc., characters indicating a variable display result, characters suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "super heat", "!!", and characters such as the model name, title, and the name of the character appearing in the game machine may be used. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

Further, the LED substrate 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means capable of causing the decorative portion 420 to emit light, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can use the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, in the second effect LED 404A, the decorative portion 420 is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emission, so that the player can make the LED substrate 403. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the base member 401, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion composed of the letter "V" is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 is not limited to this. When a plurality of decorative portions 420 are provided in the area of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative portions (for example, a pattern) having a mode different from that of the decorative portion 420 are provided in an area other than the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorations are provided. It is preferable that the number of portions is larger than that of a plurality of predetermined decorative portions. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and the number of the boundary portion BD becomes more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative portions and the plurality of predetermined decorative portions have different modes. For example, the predetermined decorative portion may be an enlarged or reduced mode of the decorative portion, and the outer shape, form, and the like. Any one of the colors, sizes, etc. may be different.

Further, the cover member 402 has a convex portion 410 which is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 which does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. It has a region other than the convex portion 410, and the translucency of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the translucency of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to see the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 through the convex portion 410, so that the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

(3rd production unit 600 and 4th production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20 is a front view showing a third effect unit and a fourth effect unit in FIG. 10-20. 10-21 is a sectional view taken along line I-I of FIG. 10-20, and FIG. 10-B is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. 10-20. 10-22 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a visual state of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configurations of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing an effect mode when the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit emit light. 10-26 are schematic front views showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and FIG. 10-26 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21 (A) and 10-26, the third effect unit 600 is a cover member arranged so as to cover the base member 601 and the front surface side of the base member 601. FIG. 10-26 (A) shows a light emitting effect unit 630 and a light emitting effect unit 630 including an LED substrate 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601 and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 603. ) And the effect position shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), the effect motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source capable of moving in the vertical direction, and the effect motor 631. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting effect unit 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. That is, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED substrate 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall projecting from the front peripheral edge of the base member 601. A plurality of third effect LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 603. The third effect LEDs 604A and 604B can irradiate light toward the front. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 603 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white. The cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the effect control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIGS. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 603, and has a plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), on the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605, the light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side is diffused and emitted toward the front. A light diffusing portion 605A composed of an uneven portion is provided so as to emit light from the surface.

The cover member 602 has a box shape with a back opening made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the base member 601 and the LED substrate 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 composed of the characters (logotype) of "XXX" is printed with a colored paint having a translucent color or a translucent sheet on which the characters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 602A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602 so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the character "XXX" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the model name, title, and appearance of the gaming machine appear. Characters such as a character's name, characters indicating a variable display result such as "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH", and characters suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "super heat", and "!!" may be used. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted forward from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 is further covered with the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused through and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the peripheral edge of the character "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are decorative. It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to the portion 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the characters "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620 in this way, when the third effect LED 604A emits light, the "XXX" Since the peripheral edge of the character is lit, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

Further, the power transmission member 632, which forms a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emitting effect unit 630, is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft having one end facing the front-rear direction, and emits light at the other end. Although it is an arm member provided with the effect unit 630, the power transmission member can be changed in various ways, and if the power can be transmitted so that the light emission effect unit 630 can be moved in the vertical direction, a rack gear, a pinion gear, or the like can be used. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth effect unit 800 includes a base member 801 and a cover member 802 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 801 and a base member. It is mainly composed of an LED substrate 803 attached to the front surface of the 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 803, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, the area surrounded by the guide rails 211. In the upper left, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a box shape having a front opening, and a part of the peripheral edge thereof is formed in an arc shape along the guide rail 211. The surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED substrate 803 is formed so as to have a smaller front view shape than the base member 801 and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. A plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. The fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 803, and a plurality of the fourth effect LED 804 are arranged along the peripheral edge portion on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 803 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, and is placed in a region surrounded by a plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED substrate 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the back surface of the inner lens 805 is reflected forward by a reflecting unit 806 for reflecting the light incident from the fourth effect LED 804 toward the front. It is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A of the portion of the standing wall erected on the front peripheral edge of the base member 801 along the guide rail 211, and the standing wall 801B other than the portion along the guide rail 211. It covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing portion 802A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802 so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth effect unit 800, when the fourth effect LED 804 emits light, the light emitted forward from the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are white, in which the surfaces of the base members 601, 801 and the LED substrates 603 and 803 are the same color, respectively. The front side of the 801 and the LED substrate 603 and 803 is covered with a transparent cover member 602 and 802, and the light emitting effect body that emits light on the front surface when the third effect LED 604A and 604B and the fourth effect LED 804 are turned on. Has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), the LED substrate 603 as an electronic component having the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601 and the front side thereof is covered. It is covered with a member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 602A is formed on the cover member 602, the cover member 602 can be seen through from the player side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, an inner lens 605 having a light diffusing portion 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED substrate 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), the vertical wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (periphery) the white LED substrate 603, so that the LED substrate 603 is a base member around the white LED substrate 603. Assimilated with 601 it is difficult to understand the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 603 and the cover member 602. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED substrate 603, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED substrate 803 as an electronic component having the fourth effect LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801 and is arranged on the front side thereof. Is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 802A is formed on the cover member 802, the cover member 802 is transparent from the player side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), by arranging the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 803, the LED substrate 803 becomes a base member 801 around the white LED substrate 803. Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801. Therefore, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

However, the fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED that injects light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the peripheral edge of the LED substrate 803, so that the LED including the fourth effect LED 804 is included. Since the front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered with the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area where the reflecting portion and the light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, the player The visibility when the LED substrate 803 including the 4th effect LED 804 is visually recognized through the inner lens 805 from the side is the LED substrate including the 3rd effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. It is higher than the visibility when the 603 is visually recognized. That is, the LED substrate 803 is more conspicuous than the LED substrate 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), And the arrangement position of the front surface in the front-rear direction is in front of the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth effect unit 800 (on the player side) (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and further, the fourth While the light emitting mode of the effect unit 800 by the fourth effect LED 804 is surface light emission, the light emission mode of the third effect unit 600 by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is spotlight (see FIG. 10-25). In FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for convenience of explaining the light emitting mode.

As described above, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, is located close to the player, and emits light with strong light. Therefore, the visibility when visually recognized from the player side is considered to be higher than that of the fourth production unit 800. That is, the third effect unit 600, which is an effect means having higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth effect unit 800, is provided at a position near the fourth effect unit 800. Since the third effect unit 600 is more conspicuously attracting the attention of the player than the four effect unit 800, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth effect unit 800, is less conspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, and is located close to the player. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the third effect. The light emitting effect unit 630 of the unit 600 is visible because at least one of the size when viewed from the player side, the position with respect to the player, and the light emitting mode is different from the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800. Should be high.

Further, the front surface of the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 as an effect means may be colored with a color having higher visibility than the surface color of the LED substrate 803, or a decorative part having a color having high visibility may be provided. By using the cover member 602 molded in a color having high visibility, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced. Further, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

Further, as the effect means, an embodiment in which the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600, which can emit light by the light emitting means and can be operated by the effect motor 631, is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be a light emitting means (lamp unit or the like) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or an effect means that does not emit light by the light emitting means, or may be a predetermined drive source. It may be an effect unit that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves) protruding forward from the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a is formed on the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3. The protruding portion 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game ball passing through the upper part of the game area Y. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game field, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by the halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game field blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, since the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided at positions corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED substrates 603 and 803 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603 and 803, a protruding portion 3A that protrudes toward the player from the LED boards 603 and 803 is provided, and the protruding portion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603 and 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED substrates 603 and 803 become shadows of the protrusions 3A and become inconspicuous.

Further, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601, 801 have been exemplified in the form of being white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these may be dark colors (for example, black), as described above. By doing so, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601, 801 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protruding portion 3A, so that they are less noticeable.

In the present embodiment, as a protrusion protruding toward the player above the electronic component and the specific member, a protrusion 3A protruding toward the player above the LED substrates 603 and 803 is applied. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protruding portion is not limited to the protruding portion projecting from a part of the gaming machine frame 3, for example, the gaming board 2 or the game. It may be composed of other gaming devices (for example, a winning ball device) or a directing device provided in the area Y. Further, the protruding portion 3A is not only fixed to the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also operates from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the player can move above the electronic parts and the specific member. It may be a protruding portion protruding to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 is when the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 10-26) in the front-rear direction.

Specifically, the moving area E2 of the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area in which the light emitting effect unit 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 is in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting effect unit 630, and the power transmission member 632 are displayed from the player side. It becomes difficult or invisible to see through 501. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the light guide plate LED 502 to emit light in a light emitting region during a moving period in which the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the effect position or an effect period located in the effect position. By executing the light emitting effect of causing the 506 to emit light, the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult to see or invisible through the light guide plate 501 from the player side, so that the power is transmitted during the moving period and the effect period. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) or the like provided along the member 632 from being conspicuous.

Further, when the light guide plate LED 502 is turned off after the light emitting effect unit 630 is moved to the effect position and the light emitting effect of the light emitting region 506 is completed, the power transmission member 632, the cable C, etc. can be visually recognized, but the light emitting effect unit By turning on the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the 630 to make the light emitting effect unit 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made inconspicuous.

Further, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and the cable C) provided so as to be operable are made visible to the player during the waiting period or the moving period waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable that the player makes it difficult or invisible from the player side, at least during the production period located at the production position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic components from being conspicuous during the production period that the player pays attention to.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment is
Electronic components (for example, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
By doing so, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members of the same color, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
The electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they have similar colors. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member have the same color (for example, black and black, white and white, etc.).

(Explanation of deformation and application of feature 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first effect LED 304, the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D, the third effect LEDs 604A, 604B, and the fourth effect LED 804 are provided as electronic components. The embodiment in which the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a circuit board without a light emitting diode (main substrate 11 not for production, production). (Including control board 12 and relay board, etc.), electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members for fixing these.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which base members 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components are applied as specific members is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating an electronic component as described above, but is a member provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member (for example, a member forming a part of another unit, a game board 2 or a game machine frame 3) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member that constitutes a part, etc.).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 forming a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components are applied as a light transmitting member is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a member having translucency even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components as described above. If the member is provided so that the player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member, a different member (for example, for example) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member forming a part of another unit, a member forming a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3, and the like).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to those having the same color.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, and 803 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member are described from the player side. It may be arranged side by side at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping a part when visually recognized. Further, if the specific member is arranged and visible around the electronic component when visually recognized from the player side, the electronic component and the specific member are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-rear direction, and the like. It may have been done.

The specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position visible from the player side together with the electronic component, and is arranged, for example, within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component. Specific members may be included.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a translucent synthetic resin material is applied as a translucent member has been illustrated, and the present invention has been illustrated. The material is not limited, and any material may be used as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member, the electronic component and the specific member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Further, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components by the player through the member. And, although a form in which a part or the whole area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member can be visually recognized is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component is the member. If at least a part of the specific member is not visible through the member, the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized together. You just have to.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and the base member 301 as a specific member. Although the embodiment in which the electronic components and the specific members are arranged along the front side of the 401, 601, 801 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic components and the specific members are not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific members. It does not have to be. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged in a state of being obliquely inclined with respect to the translucent member.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the entire surface surface of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 is set to a predetermined color (black or white) is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the portion of the electronic component and the specific member that can be seen through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) is a similar color. If so, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be a similar color. Further, the colors of these electronic parts and the specific member may be colored at the time of molding the member, may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be colored by attaching a sticker or the like to a predetermined color. You may be.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Not, for example, a predetermined electron provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player, separately from the LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member. Parts (for example, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members (for example, first start port switch 22A, second) provided around the predetermined electronic component. In those provided with a start port switch 22B, a member for fixing the solenoids 81, 82, etc.), predetermined electronic components (for example, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) are , It is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

As described above, the predetermined electronic components such as the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the solenoids 81 and 82 provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player are in balance with the predetermined members for fixing them. Since a general-purpose product can be used without considering the above, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, by setting the color of the specific member to be a color having the same hue and having either higher lightness or saturation of the color of the electronic component, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively inconspicuous.

Further, by coloring the translucent member with a color similar to that of the electronic component and the specific member, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, for example, when an electronic component such as a black LED substrate is arranged on the right side of the game board 2, it is provided around the electronic component on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5. By providing the outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or the same color as the electronic component so as to be visible to the player separately from the specific member, the black members are arranged in a well-balanced manner on the left and right sides of the image display device 5. As a result, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, so that the electronic components can be made less noticeable. In this way, the electronic component can be made less noticeable by arranging the member having the same color or the same color as the electronic component at a distant position separately from the specific member.

Further, the configuration related to the feature unit 75SG may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to the feature unit 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK and the like. For example, when the effect described by the feature units 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed by the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described by the feature unit 75SG provided around the image display device 5 Since the electronic components of the second effect unit 400, the third effect unit 600, and the fourth effect unit 800 are less noticeable, it is possible to make the above effect look suitable.

Specifically, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LED, and the light emitting effect is executed when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like. In the case of controlling so as not to be performed, the periphery (for example, the game effect lamp 9) of the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301, 401, 601, 801) It is also possible to control so that the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position closer to the above) is not executed (or the amount of light is lower than the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 or the like). By doing so, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, so that the electronic component or the specific member is prevented from becoming conspicuous. can.

Further, among the second light emitting members provided around the electronic component and the specific member, the decorative portion 420 of the translucent member arranged on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member can be surface-emitted. For a light emitting member such as LED404A that is inconspicuous even if light emission is continued, the amount of light may be maintained (execution is not limited) even when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is controlled so as not to be executed. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members inconspicuous without excessively reducing the effect of the effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls can be used. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the game machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine in which is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result (for example). , Pachinko game machine 1, 75SG001, etc.), and electronic components (for example, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visibly provided to the player, and electronic components that are provided around the electronic components. A specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) formed in a color similar to that of the component, and a translucent member through which the player sees the electronic component and the specific member. (For example, cover members 302, 402, 602, 802), a launching means capable of launching a game medium into the game area according to the operation of the player, and a game in the game area. Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the medium can flow down, a guidance display means for displaying a guidance display using an image display to prompt the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow down path. The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, the base member 301) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301). , Decorative pattern 331) (see FIG. 10-12), the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means displays the specific display of the variable display. In a predetermined period after the result, the second guidance display is performed before the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed, and the advantageous state is displayed. After the completion of the name display, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated and the second guidance display is continued. A gaming machine that continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the decorative pattern, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. In addition, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction.

That is, it is possible to make the gaming machine look good while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and the first guidance display and the second guidance display are predetermined in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Do not overemphasize the instruction by emphasizing the instruction to launch the game ball in the direction, and then instructing to take over the second guidance display and launch the game ball in the predetermined direction without taking over the first guidance display. By doing so, it is possible not to feel annoyed, and moreover, the second guidance display is first performed to instruct to conservatively launch the game ball in a predetermined direction, and then the name of the advantageous state is recognized and recognized. After that, it is possible to firmly instruct the game ball to be launched in a predetermined direction by the first guidance display. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in a gaming field and is easy to understand the direction in which the gaming ball should be launched in an advantageous state.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine, which can increase the degree of freedom in design and can suitably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the gaming ball in a predetermined direction, the display result of the variable display. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the specific display result, and is a launching means capable of launching a gaming medium into the gaming area according to the operation of the player, and the game Of the first flow path and the second flow path in which the game medium can flow down in the area, a guide for displaying a guide using an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path. The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means includes, in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. The second guidance display is performed before the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed, and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first 1 Guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued, and the control of the advantageous state is completed. In a special state after the above, a gaming machine that continues the second guidance display can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Board configuration]
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, it may be determined whether or not the recovery condition can be satisfied by confirming or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the recovery process (step S904) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. By the recovery process in step S904, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), the setting change process (step S907) is executed after the initialization process (step S906) is executed. The initialization process of step S906 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S905 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S907, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S906 is performed. The setting change process of step S907 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the recovery process of step S904 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. When the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S906 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is enabled (step S9010). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 14A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 14B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is related to the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is small for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

<Explanation of feature 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 075F of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-60.

[Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to feature section 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which concerns on the feature part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 15-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 15-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter, referred to as “)”. Usually referred to as a grand prize opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in the space between the gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is equipped with a large winning opening door, and by sliding the opening and closing of the large winning opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the route to the normal large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Will be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 15-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter, referred to as “)”. Form a V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is located on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the path to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 15-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V prize opening. .. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the gaming board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided above the attacker in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and the left side of the image display device 5 are provided. It is equipped with a board left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d has a character attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this example) when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks when the movable body 32 is stopped or in an operating state. "XXX") is made to emit light. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light in the vicinity of the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light in the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a housing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the housing imitating the character on the right side of the image display device 5 is made to emit light. .. The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a housing that imitates a character, similarly to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the panel right lamp 075F009F and the panel left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a frame lamp composed of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. To be equipped.

Here, FIG. 15-2 is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp in a counterclockwise direction from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example) to emit light in the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special drawing LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and the ordinary symbol indicator 20, as shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED substrate that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED.

Here, FIG. 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED substrate 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 15-3 (a), the special figure LED substrate 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 showing the variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable showing the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and special figure 2 storage display unit indicating the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. 075F024, the normal figure storage display unit 075F025 indicating the number of reserved normal figures, the normal figure display unit 075F026 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 that urges the player to hit right. It is provided with a probability variation display unit 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot, a time reduction display unit 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 075F027 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of a special figure or a normal symbol, the result, the current game state, the number of holds, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is performed and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED substrate 075F020 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing the right-handed display unit 075F030 by a lighting means such as an LED. In the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, when the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F030 lights up (lights up) and does not urge the player to hit right. That is, when urging the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F030 only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. It is to operate the hitting ball operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left region of the game area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A exists ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V Grand Prize) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path to the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into. In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 075F030 urges the player to hit right. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second start winning opening and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is paid out by inserting a game ball into the normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player hits the right while the display prompting the player to hit the right is displayed, so that the V-large winning opening is opened. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probabilistic state. For this reason, the player can have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. It should be noted that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first opposite field path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the number of second reserved storages, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status of the second special figure or A special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 showing a display result and a right-handed display unit 075F055 for urging the player to hit the right side are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is performed and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of. Hereinafter, expressing the fluctuation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, expressing the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and hits right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off. The effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is confirmed, and the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 15-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 15-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L , It is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) by the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special drawing LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 15-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and reach effects. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays the first hold storage display area 075F005D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays. It constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second hold storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that a special symbol is being variably displayed, and a third display area 075F005Sb including a display of the first reserved storage number and a display of the second reserved storage number. is doing.

Of these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and variable display of decorative symbols can be executed. It has become. Further, a small symbol 075F005M having a size smaller than each decorative symbol is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small symbols are the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left", the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C in the "middle", and the decorative symbol display area on the "right". The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols displayed on the 5R are arranged vertically. Further, the small symbol 075F005M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 15-5, a decorative symbol is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 075F005M is the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern in the part. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display is provided.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-6 to 15-8.

(Big hit type)
FIG. 15-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 15-6, in the hit type table, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state are shown for each type of hit in the jackpot. , And the number of open times (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpots, and 10R probability variation jackpots are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1st round, and the second round is also referred to as the 2nd round. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize (for example, a control or lid that shortens the time to open the lid for opening and closing the V jackpot to be shorter than a predetermined time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In a normal jackpot, the condition that such a low accuracy and high base state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 fluctuation displays and the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 5R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are set from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 10R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are set from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have a common decorative symbol that stops when a jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot have the same fanfare effect (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs, and during the round of the jackpot game state. (For example, the background, the characters appearing, the sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot has occurred as far as the stopped decorative pattern, the fanfare effect, and the round effect are seen. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variation big hit, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 4Rth). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state.

As described above, in the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability variation jackpot has occurred halfway through the round, so these jackpots are also referred to as chance bonuses.

As for the 10R probability variation jackpot, the V jackpot opens in the predetermined round (9Rth in the present embodiment) as in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, a decorative pattern that stops when a jackpot occurs, a fanfare production mode (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) and a round production performed during the round of the jackpot game state. Is different from the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability variation jackpot is also referred to as a special bonus.

(Each random number)
FIG. 15-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 15-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type to be either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 10R probability variation jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining the fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4).

In the present embodiment, whether or not the player is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). Then, out of a plurality of types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot as a jackpot game state, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10R probability variation jackpot, which jackpot is to be selected is based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is used using the variation pattern determination random number (random 4). Is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach fluctuation pattern type with super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Further, in the case of loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type without reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a fluctuation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type differs between the time saving state and the non-time saving state (in the time saving state, compared with the case where the time saving state is not obtained). Therefore, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set high), so that when the time is shortened, compared to when the time is not shortened. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 15-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 15-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in RO101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change state) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 15-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value in the normal jackpot determination table, and the right of FIG. 15-8 (B) is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variation jackpot determination table are set. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 15-8 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values shown in) is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 15-8 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

15-8 (B) and 15-8 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 15-8 (B) is a first special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 15-8 (C) is a second special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 15-8 (B), numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, such as "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and , The jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "10R probability variation jackpot" is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 15-8 (C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is set, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-8 (B) and 15-8, the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to "5R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the jackpot symbol. The special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 display a stopped big hit symbol by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. Can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot symbol can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot type, and the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. Determine the jackpot design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the percentage of "10R probability variation jackpot" selected for the jackpot of the second special symbol is higher than that of the jackpot type that can be selected in the first special symbol, and the player The rate at which a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is selected is high.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 15-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 15-9 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variation jackpot is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined. Loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variation jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variation jackpot designation command, or these are collectively referred to as 8C system commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command for designating the initialization (designating to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the power failure recovery (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability change state specification command for designating the background of the probability change state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95 series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of a 5R normal jackpot. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A003 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designated command, the jackpot start 2 designated command, and the jackpot start 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The command specified while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big prize opening is also called an A2 command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of the 5R normal jackpot. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designated command, the jackpot end 2 designated command, and the jackpot end 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command that specifies that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device pass designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

The command B100 (H) is a first start winning award designation command for designating that there was a first start winning award. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the big hit judgment, the big hit type judgment, and the variable pattern type judgment at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 15-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 15-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (second special). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the symbol (step 075FS001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step 075FS002). If a predetermined period does not elapse from the suspension of fluctuation (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step 075FS004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (third). Data indicating "first" is set in the flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the 1 special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating the "first" is set or the data indicating the "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second hold storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 15-8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the number of jackpot judgment values is probablely changed between the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 15-8 (A) is set) in which a large number of jackpot judgment values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 15-8 (A) is set), which is set less than the hour jackpot determination table, is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 15-8 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier condition is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 15-8 (B) and the second table in FIG. 15-8 (C). One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-8 (B). Further, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-8 (C) when the special symbol pointer indicates "second".

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and holds them using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 15-8 (B) and 15-8 (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol differs for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variation jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variation jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 15-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 15-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type when the jackpot flag is set, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the loss pattern variation pattern. Select the type judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random number 2 (random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select any one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types. To decide.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 15-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 15-11, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated to correspond to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 15-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 15-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbol (step 075FS301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 075F021 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 is terminated. In addition, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

Further, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds are obtained for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal big winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R and the V big winning opening is opened at the 4th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal big winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V big winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5), which is the jackpot display time, is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has expired, and the time reduction flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step 075FS311 (N in step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability change flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the transition of the game state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability / low base state), and in step 075FS316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS316), and the processing is terminated.

(Big hit pre-opening treatment)
FIG. 15-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 15-14, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 15-15 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 15-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step 075FS509), and the process proceeds to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 15-16 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIGS. 15-16, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process is performed. To finish.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step 075FS605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V open winning opening (also referred to as the V open round), that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), the solenoid 075F083 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 15-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing. As shown in FIG. 15-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning area is set (step 075FS704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the probability variation determination flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time reduction flag indicating that the time is shortened is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize which of the probabilistic change, the time saving, and the normal gaming state is in the probabilistic change state specification command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Production processing during big hit)
Next, the processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 15-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 15-18, in the big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the effect control CPU 120 when the data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot ends are set. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, the control of the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed according to the content of the process data set next (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display the image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5. .. Further, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / blinking / extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continuously controlled according to the set process data contents. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the process corresponding to the fanfare effect is to execute the fanfare effect under the control of the effect device. Set the data. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is used to urge the player to right-handed. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the big winning opening opening designated command (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each big hit round, the effect control device executes the effect during the round as follows. In order to do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of a 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set the process data of. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot opening designation command (A102). The jackpot round (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability variation suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

The process data for executing the V probability change suggestion effect (see FIGS. 15-41) when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) during opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot. To set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102). The jackpot round (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability variation suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the V notice that the next 4R is the V open round is announced. Process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 15-42) is set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103). The jackpot round (3R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after opening the large winning opening after 3R of the 5R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 15-43) aiming at the V that aims at the thing. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A203). The jackpot round (3R in this case) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set. The effect aiming at V is a guidance display using an image display relating to the V large winning opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the production aiming at V, an image urging the player to hit right is displayed so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V large winning opening which is a specific area. In the production aiming at V, an image pointing to the V large winning opening itself, which is a specific area, may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V large winning opening, which is a specific area, may be displayed. , An image may be displayed that points to the route leading to the V-large winning opening, which is a specific area.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A104 command) during opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 continues to aim at V and execute the effect (see FIGS. 15-44). Set the process data for. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104). The jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A108 command) during opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 8R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs a V advance notice effect to announce that the next 9R is the V open round. Set the process data to execute. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108). The jackpot round (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the big winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V big winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the production aiming at V that aims at that. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A208). The jackpot round (8R in this case) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the process data for continuously aiming at V and executing the effect is set. .. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A109). The jackpot round (9R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aiming at V) according to the specified round in the jackpot is set.

Further, when the output control CPU 120 receives the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the output control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect under the control of the effect device as shown below. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIGS. 15-44) when the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) is received from the CPU 103 during the 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot. ..

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets the process data for executing the V winning effect.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 has an ending effect (FIGS. 15-46, FIG. 15) indicating the end of the jackpot game state. -47) Set the process data to execute.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103. Perform the production of.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. Regarding the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 075F has the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game of the part related to the feature unit 075F will be described below. do.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first hits the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the area on the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpots, and 10R probability variation jackpots. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handed characters (for example, "right-handed") are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting, for example, a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10 times in the case of 10R probability variation jackpot). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is open at the 1st to 3rd R and the 5th R, but the V big winning opening is open only at the 4th R. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize, the V prize is not won. Further, since the V prize is not won, the effect of aiming at V is not executed at the 4th R, and the same background image as the 1R is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and at the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the hit is a probability variation jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion effect, it is notified that it is a normal jackpot instead of a probability variation jackpot. After that, the V prize opening is opened on the 4th R, but the V prize does not occur, and the normal large winning opening is opened on the subsequent 5R, and the ending effect is executed when the 5R is completed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 4th R. Specifically, in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, as in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the V probability variation suggests whether or not the 2R is a probability variation jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is a V open round is executed. In the 4th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 5th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 5th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds, and at the 7th round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the probability variation jackpot is executed is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal big hit and 150 times in the case of 5R probability change big hit and 10R probability change big hit). Will be done. Further, in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 10R probability variation jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state is in the probability variation state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) controlled in the time saving state. Is controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes the low accuracy high base state, and in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes the high accuracy high base state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 continue to execute the right-handed promotion effect. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal figure is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of "hit the normal figure" in the normal state game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened more frequently, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening more frequently and the second start is started. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize at the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As a type of jackpot in the second special figure game, as described above, there is a 10R probability variation jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 has continued since the first hit.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Since it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th R. Specifically, as in the case of the first hit, the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time saving state and a probability change state (high accuracy and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 continue to execute the right-handed promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probabilistic state or time saving state after the jackpot round is completed, and the player will be in the probabilistic state or time saving after the jackpot round per consecutive chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probabilistic state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 is also completed. As a result, the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
The timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-19 to 15-21. FIG. 15-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during the hit fluctuation. FIG. 15-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during the jackpot. FIG. 15-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It should be noted that FIGS. 15-19 to 15-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 15-19, at t1, when the first special figure game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 issues a hold storage number designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (C1 system command), background specification command (95 system command), symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect during fluctuation according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol (for example, reach effect, notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the first hold storage display area 075F005D by specifying the first hold storage number based on the hold storage number designation command, or the lighting mode of the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051. To update. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 identifies that the special symbol variation starts based on the symbol variation designation command, and sets the effect start timing. Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence / absence of a big hit and the type of the big hit based on the display result designation command, and determines the decorative pattern according to the identification. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the effect content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach) based on the variable pattern designation command. Set the type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 issues a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120 at t3 thereafter. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image congratulating the big hit on the image display device 5 or outputs a sound congratulating the big hit from the speakers 8L and 8R as a fanfare effect. Set the process data for. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image prompting right-handed striking on the image display device 5 and outputs a sound prompting right-handed striking from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed striking promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-20, when the big hit round starts at t4 after that, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening, and at the same time, the production control CPU 120 is given a command to specify that the big winning opening is open (A101 command). To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the first round.

After that, when the 1st round is completed at t5, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A201 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the second R starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A102 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the second round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability change suggestion effect (see FIGS. 15-41) based on the command (A102 command) during which the large winning opening is open.

After that, when the second R is completed at t7, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A202 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 3Rs start at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A103 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3rd round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V notice effect (see FIGS. 15-42) based on the command (A103 command) during which the large winning opening is open.

After that, when the 3rd round is completed at t9, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the inter-round effect between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 15-43) aiming at V based on the designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 15-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening, and at the same time, the effect control CPU 120 is given a command (A104 command) to open the large winning opening. To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a V notice effect (see FIGS. 15-42) based on a command (A104 command) during which the winning opening is open, and then aims at V (see FIG. 15-43). Set the process data to execute.

After that, when the V prize is generated at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIGS. 15-44).

After that, when the 4th round is completed at t12, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A204 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 5th R starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A105 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round at the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th R is completed at t14, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A205 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a probabilistic change state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command according to whether or not the number of reserved storages exceeds 0.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved storages exceeds 0, the CPU 103 specifies the number of reserved storages (C2 series command), the background designation command (95 series command), and the symbol variation designation for the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the effect during fluctuation according to the fluctuation of the second special symbol (for example, reach effect, notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIGS. 15-60) that can identify that the game is not being performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image having an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative symbol or a small symbol on the image display device 5, or stops the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 15-60, and the game is such that the game is not performed, such as a character image or a logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 15-22 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting mode of the lamp. In the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L). , The right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off, as shown in FIG. 15-22 (A). It is represented by.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all lit as shown in FIG. 15-22 (B). It is expressed in the aspect of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each light / blink / blink in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by a hatching mode as shown in FIG. 15-22 (C).

[Direction mode of pachinko game machine 1]
Next, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. 15-23 to 15-33 and 15-38 to 15-50 are explanatory views showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game.

As shown in FIG. 15-23 (a), when the lost symbol is stopped due to the change of the special symbol of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stop of the lost symbol. After that, when there is a first hold storage number, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) to the effect control CPU 120. ), Display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the change in the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the first special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-23 (b1) to 15-24 (b3) as a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a background designation command (95 series command). Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-23 (b1) and 15-24 (b3) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights in a manner corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-23 (b2), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 15-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 gives the effect control CPU 120 a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting. Send commands (FD commands). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-24 (c1) to 15-38 (d2) as a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-24 (c1) and 15-38 (d2) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

Here, the fanfare production will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In the present embodiment, the fanfare production includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The blessing part is a production part in which a production for congratulating the big hit is executed, and as will be described later in FIG. 15-24 (c1), an image for congratulating the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5. The display, the sound for congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. The name display part is a production part that notifies the player that the jackpot round will start by notifying the name of the generated jackpot gaming state and also informs the player of the type of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred. As will be described later in -24 (c2) and (c3), a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state may be displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The right-handed promotion part is an effect part that encourages the player to hit right-handed, and as will be described later in FIGS. 15-24 (c4) to 15-33 (c29), the image display of characters and figures is used. A large right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to hit right is executed. The effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol is stopped and the symbol is confirmed, and then receives the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , Start the fanfare production, and execute the fanfare until the normal big prize opening opens and the big hit round starts.

As shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1), as a blessing part in the fanfare production, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed as an image. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that the sound displayed on the device 5 or congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode congratulates the big hit. Or something. Further, as a right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character of "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5. The production is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed on each layer. As shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect is an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, "Congratulations!" Along with the character image. It is displayed on the layer on the front side (the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko game machine 1 side) rather than the character image). Further, in the fanfare effect, a sound prompting right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed hitting promotion effect, the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 promotes right-handed hitting. (Lights up in this example). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), and lights the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the small right-handed display promotion effect is based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). The image display device 5 displays an image composed of the figures and characters in the above, and an image congratulating the big hit. At this time, the image composed of the figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect located on the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big hit. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. Will be done. At that time, first, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display / off designation command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect based on the received background specification command. Upon completion, the image display device 5 displays the background image in the normal state. The image composed of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055. Becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare production, a part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, among the character images of "CHANGE BONUS !!" "CHANGE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, the sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c3), as the name display part in the fanfare production, following FIG. 15-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example). Among the character images of "CHANGE BONUS !!", "BONUS !!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 15-24 (c4) to FIG. 15-33 (c29), as a right-handed promotion effect, a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character "right-handed"). ) Is displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5, and a large right-handed promotion effect is executed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data tables shown in FIGS. 15-34 to 15-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs guidance light emission that urges the player to hit the right side by moving the light emitting portion of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table. In the present embodiment, the light emitting portion literally refers to a portion that emits light, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lit lamp is located is referred to as a light emitting portion, and other lamps. The place where the lamp that is not lit (that is, the lamp that is off) is located is not called the light emitting part. In another example, the light emitting portion refers to a portion that emits light with high brightness, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. The place where the lamp lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light emitting place is located may not be called the light emitting place. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 15-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIGS. 15-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, board left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the production time of each of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is specified. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec and then a large right-handed promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right-handed promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 decides to repeat the large right-handed promotion effect of 2000 msec twice. Become.

FIG. 15-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIGS. 15-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, each time of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is subdivided and referred to in each time zone. The grandchild table is specified.

Here, the grandchild table W11 common to the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated for the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U of the attacker, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are turned off without being used in the large right-handed promotion effect, no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. For the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, the grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, the grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and the grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

15-36 and 15-37 are explanatory views showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 15-36 shows the data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIGS. 15-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all lamps are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). The data of turning off (0x000000) is specified in. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 15-2 are specified for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, in FIGS. 15-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, the data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and the data (000) at the timing of ending lighting are used. On the other hand, a broken line circle is attached.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T1, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T2, and then the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T3. The second lamp lights up, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T4, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T5, and then the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T6. The lamp lights up, then the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T7, then the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T8, and then the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T9. Then, at T10, the 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first the 4th lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T46, then the 3rd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T47, and then the 2nd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then At T52, the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T54, the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect elapses. It should be noted that the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect after all the lamps are turned off at T56 is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time (1000 msec). It is T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L, and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If the grandchild table W11 in which the above-mentioned data is stored is used, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), it starts from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , Frame right lamp Up to the 8th lamp of 075F009R, the frame lamp lights in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. The large right-handed promotion effect by such a frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 15-37 shows the data in the grandchild tables K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIGS. 15-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all of them are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Data for turning off the lamp (0x000000) is specified. In the grandchild table K11, regarding the movable body lamp 9d, among the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X). Data are specified for each of the above. Further, in FIGS. 15-37, for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and data (000) at the timing of ending lighting. ) Is marked with a broken line.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d lights up at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d lights up at T4, and then the movable body lamp at T5. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Turns off. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect elapses. It should be noted that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and then kept off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. It is (T57). Further, as compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

Using the grandchild table K11 in which the above-mentioned data is stored, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L can be used. While it is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. After that, each lamp continues to light in seven colors, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Turns off. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is lit in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side, starting from the lighting of the left X, and then to the lamp of the middle X and the lamp of the right X. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 15-37 shows the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIGS. 15-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on, and the data is turned off. The data of (0x0000000) is specified.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec with respect to 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the attacker lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec to determine a predetermined value. The color change of the pattern (for example, seven colors) is repeated.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 320 msec to be turned on, and the data of extinguishing (0x0000000) is specified as the data. There is.

When the large right-handed promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. The attacker lamp 9c is made to repeat the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to it a plurality of times, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned off by referring to the grandchild table A11c over the last 320 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on, then the frame lamp is turned off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned on. Will turn off. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Further, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the color is turned off at the beginning, the color of a predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and then the color is turned off, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on 3 It is not necessary to prepare data for all the time from the beginning to the end for lighting of 2000 msec by repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for the repetition of the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle while dividing it into scenarios. , It suffices to prepare the data of only the repeating part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 15-25 (c4), an effect mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c5), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-26 (c6), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-26 (c7), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-26 (c8), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-29 (c15), in the image display device 5, the character image of "right" is displayed overlaid on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-29 (c16), in the image display device 5, the character image of "right" continues to be displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-29 (c17), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c18), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c19), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c20), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c21), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c22), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c24), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the blinking attacker lamp 9c is also turned off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. As a result, a series of first large right-handed promotion effects is completed.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c26), the second large right-handed promotion effect starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamp 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In the second large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect. As a result, when the game shifts to the big hit round after the big right-handed promotion effect is completed, the BGM (sound according to the background of the big hit round) in the big hit round and the sound in the big right-handed promotion effect do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 15-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second large right-handed promotion effect, the game effect lamp 9 lights / blinks / turns off in the same manner as the first large right-handed promotion effect. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to right-handed in a manner that emphasizes it more than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, by executing the large right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound (for example, a cure sound effect) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect, which is effective for the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed strikes, in the second large right-handed strike promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed strike promotion effect, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that is not output. Can be prevented from interfering with.

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion effect, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to appear gradually in stages, and moreover, the right-handed hitting is effectively promoted by lighting or blinking the lamp by the game effect lamp 9. Yes, the effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2). For example, the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect appears one character at a time, but all the character images appear at once in the character image in the name image in the big hit game state. In addition, the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect is larger than that of all the character images in the name image in the big hit game state. Further, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big hit game state is displayed and the player is notified that the big hit has been achieved, the player can be notified by further emphasizing the right-handed hit by the big right-handed promotion effect.

Since the attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and aims at the time of launching the game ball, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a flashy color such as seven colors that the player can easily recognize and blinks. It is possible to draw more attention to the player's target. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without blinking.

In the following example, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R probability variation jackpot, but other production modes are the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot. Further, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning effect are not executed, but other production modes are the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 15-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is turned off and the second big right-handed promotion effect is completed, the switch to the big hit round is switched as shown in FIG. 15-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually reduced by fading out the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command), a series of effect data up to the stage shown in FIG. 15-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-39 (d3) to 15-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command) during the opening of the large winning opening. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-39 (d3) and 15-40 (e4) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in the image display called "transition". "Transition" is a switch that is inserted between the first cut and the second cut when the scene of the video is switched from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It is an effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to the second degree (for example, 0) which is lower than the first degree. % Or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually reduced from 100% (first degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) opaquely, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually change the rate) are not fade-ins. When the opacity (which can be said to be opaque) is changed instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned% value is reversed. That is, in the fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) higher than the second degree. ) Will be changed over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in the fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of the object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99) higher than the first degree. %) Is changed over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) transparently, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually change the rate) are not fade-outs. When changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), in the fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is set to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) To a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) lower than the first degree, over a predetermined time.

For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparency) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!" By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% in the state where the rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the characters "Right-handed !!" The image is gradually made transparent to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen located behind the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. By gradually lowering it to, the background image during the jackpot round is gradually made opaque to make it easier to see (fade in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer of the screen.

As a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade". Crossfade is, for example, by fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. As an appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image always displayed in the second layer of the screen located on the back side. Is shown once during the switching from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, so that it is different from the method such as crossfade.

In the present embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without receiving. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or deteriorated, such as the image of the small right-handed promotion effect can be seen a little but the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears due to fade-in, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the big winning opening is usually opened. , A background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed. Furthermore, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound according to the background of the big hit round) in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. As described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect has already been completed.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e2), during 1R, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. Arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e3), when the first round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A201 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e4), the large winning opening is normally kept closed during the round, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, it continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed in the upper right.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A102 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2nd round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-41 (e5) to 15-42 (e8) based on the command (A102 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-41 (e5) and 15-42 (e8) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the large winning opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e6), the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed during 2R. Specifically, the character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed together with the image prompting the operation of the push button 31B so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability variation suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestion effect, the V is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. A character image of "Success !!" is displayed as an effect to notify that it is a probabilistic jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability variation suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e8), when the second round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A202 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e9), during the round, the large winning opening is normally kept closed, and the center of the screen of the image display device 5 is overlapped with the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. The text image of "Success !!" is displayed, and the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A103 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-42 (e10) to 15-43 (e12) based on the command (A103 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-42 (e10) and 15-43 (e12) is not triggered by an effect control command, but proceeds with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal large winning opening is opened and the V notice effect is executed. Specifically, the character image of "grab V in the next round !!" is displayed together with the character image so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e11), during the 3Rs, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is overlapped with the character image in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The text image of "Grab V in the next round !!" is displayed, and the image (arrows and letters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e12), when the 3Rs are completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A203 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect aiming at V during the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), during the rounds, the effect is executed aiming at V while the large winning opening is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large), which is the target (place) aimed at the player by right-handed, is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image according to the effect during the round. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the production aiming at V, it is possible to urge the player to right-handed to let the game ball enter the V large winning opening by using the image display related to the V large winning opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A104 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command (A104 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-44 (e14) and 15-44 (e15) is not triggered by an effect control command, but proceeds with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V large winning opening is opened, and the production is continuously aimed at V. As a result, the player will aim for the V-large winning opening by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15), during 4R, the effect of aiming at V is executed, and the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the game ball enters the V large winning opening and the V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-44 (e16) to 15-45 (e18) based on the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-44 (e16) and 15-45 (e18) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16), when the V prize effect is executed, the V prize is generated by overlapping the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The image of "V" is displayed, and the image (arrows and letters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-45 (e17), when the 4th round is completed, the V large winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A204 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIGS. 15-45 (e18), the V large winning opening and the normal large winning opening remain closed during the round, and overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and further, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A105 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-45 (e19) to 15-46 (e21) based on the command (A105 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-45 (e19) and 15-46 (e21) is not triggered by an effect control command, but proceeds with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 15-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal grand prize opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner is continued. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (e20), during 5R, the effect during the round is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be in the upper right. (Arrows and letters) are displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (e21), when the 5th round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A205 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening. Further, at a predetermined timing thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-46 (f1) to 15-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-46 (f1) and 15-47 (f4) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (f1), when the ending effect is started, an image for selecting the stage in the probability change state after the big hit game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f2), during the ending effect, a name image (in this example, a character image of “Dream RUSH !!”) indicating the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the character image. It is displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f3), the immersive suppression notification effect is executed during the ending effect. Specifically, an image for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game, such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game. Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately." Is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. At the time of consecutive hits, a game result image showing the result of the game in the big hit game state (for example, the number of prize balls) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first hit. Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f4), an image for preventing forgetting to take a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card, is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

When there is a second hold storage number after the ending effect is completed, the CPU 103 specifies the hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), the background designation command (95 series command), and the symbol variation designation for the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative symbol in response to the change in the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the second special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-48 (g1) and (g2) as a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command. Set based on (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-48 (g1) and (g2) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g1), even during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g2), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, in the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop.

When there is a second hold storage number after the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command) and a background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , The symbol variation specification command (8D system command), the display result specification command (8C system command), and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative symbol in response to the change in the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the second special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-48 (g3) to 15-49 (g5) as a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and so on. Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-48 (g3) and 15-49 (g5) is not triggered by an effect control command, but proceeds with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g3), even during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), a group notice effect is executed as a notice effect during the jackpot fluctuation. The group notice effect is a specific symbol that disappears after the reach symbol becomes difficult to see due to the appearance of objects such as characters in stages or at once on the screen of the image display device 5. It is a production that makes a match (for example, 777) appear. Even if the advance notice effect that makes it difficult to see the design is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the effect image. Arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the production image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed striking effect or the player promotes the small right-handed striking due to the display of the production image such as the group notice. The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the image of the effect can be seen a little but the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g6), when a big hit (10R probability variation big hit) occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 gives the effect control CPU 120 a big hit start designation command (A0 system command). To send. Since the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed display lighting command (FD command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect data of FIGS. 15-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-50 (h1) and (h2) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Yattane !!") is displayed on the image display device 5. Alternatively, a sound congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be a lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), a name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS !!" in this example) showing the name of the jackpot game state that occurred after the fanfare effect was started is the image display device 5. The sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. In addition, in the case of consecutive chan hits per special figure 2, since the large right-handed promotion effect has already been executed when the special figure 1 is hit, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and further. , The frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as V notice effect, V aiming effect, and V winning effect are executed during the round as shown in FIGS. 15-40 to 15-46, and when the big hit round ends. , The ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 15-46 and 15-47. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-48, the probability change state after the big hit game state is controlled again. In this series of games, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and a fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display units 075F055 of the unit 075F050 keeps lighting. Eventually, when the probability change state after the big hit game state ends and the normal state is controlled without the big hit occurring, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display / off designation command to the effect control CPU 120 for the effect control. The CPU 120 erases the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and also displays the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Turn off each of the parts 075F055. As a result, the player will hit the left again in the normal state.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from power failure]
FIG. 15-51 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from the power failure during the fanfare effect according to the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power failure shown in FIG. 15-51 assumes a power failure 1 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIGS. 15-51, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 15). The state of -24 (c1)) and the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" in this example) are displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 15-24 (c2)). (State), only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-28 (c14)), and the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is "right-handed! If a power failure occurs in any of the states in which the character image of "!" Is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A101 command), the effect image in 1R as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!"), and a name image showing the name of the big hit game state (in this example, "CHANGE BONUS !!" (Character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed !!" added to the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs before the large right-handed promotion effect is executed or before the large right-handed promotion effect is completed, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, at the very least, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right immediately after recovering from the power failure, and he forgets to hit right and cannot usually let the game ball enter the grand prize opening. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 15-52 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power interruption shown in FIGS. 15-52 assumes a power interruption 2 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 15-52, when an electric power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. If a prize ball is obtained during the subsequent round, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, for example, 10 pt is added for every 10 pieces obtained. The point image is not limited to the one displayed at 0 pt after returning from the power failure, and the point may not be known by the predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power-off, the player is hit right-handed. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 15-53 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 15-53 causes the power supply 3 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 15-53, when a power failure occurs while an image corresponding to the effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 15-54 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from the power failure during two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power interruption shown in FIGS. 15-54 assumes a power interruption 4 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 15-54, when an electric power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestion effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-41 (e7)), the image is displayed. After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured in.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power-off, the player is hit right-handed. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 15-55 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 15-55 is a power interruption 5 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 15-55, when a power failure occurs while the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the round after 2R (the state of FIG. 15-42 (e9)), the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured in.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 15-56 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when recovering from the power failure during the round after 3 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 15-56 causes the power supply 6 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after the 3Rs and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 15-56, when a power failure occurs in a state where the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-43 (e13)) during the round after 3R, the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the effect aiming at V as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control Based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103, the CPU 120 aims at V as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e14) and executes the effect. It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the V grand prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 15-57 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during the four rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power failure shown in FIG. 15-57 assumes a power failure 7 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 15-57, an image corresponding to the effect of aiming at V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. Is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-44 (e16)), and if a power failure occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the power is turned on to "recovering ...". The character image of is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R as shown in FIGS. 15-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power-off, the player is hit right-handed. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done. Further, when a power failure occurs while aiming at V and performing a small right-handed promotion effect as in 4R, and as shown in FIG. 15-51 described above, it is small together with a large right-handed promotion effect. In the case where a power failure occurs while executing the right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed while the effect aiming at V and the large right-handed promotion effect are not executed after recovering from the power failure in common with each other. Is at least running. Therefore, in a common manner in any situation, it is possible to urge the player to hit right at least immediately after recovering from the power failure.

FIG. 15-58 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after 4 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 15-58 causes the power supply 8 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 15-58, when a power failure occurs in a state (state in FIG. 15-45 (e18)) in which an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the round after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 15-59 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from a power failure during the final round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power failure shown in FIG. 15-59 assumes a power failure 9 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 15-59, the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 15). When a power failure occurs in the state of −46 (e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of “Recovering…” is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it becomes the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, the image display device 5 displays an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIGS. 15-46 (f1).

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the final round of the big hit, the small right-handed promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power failure, the player will be notified. It is possible to encourage right-handed hits and prevent forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 15-60 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from a power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 15-60 assumes a power interruption 10 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending effect and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIGS. 15-60, among the ending effects, an image for selecting a stage in the probability change state after the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-46 (f1)), a character. A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the image (state in FIG. 15-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the immersive suppression notification effect, and the result of the game in the jackpot game state are shown. A state in which the game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-47 (f3)), and an image for preventing forgetting to remove the card owned by the player are displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (state of FIG. 15-47 (f4)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the character image of "Recovering ..." is turned on by turning on the power. Is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, when there is a hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , Waits until the display result specification command (8C system command) and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are received, and when these commands are received, the hold storage number specification command (C1 system command, C2 system command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), the display result specification command (8C system command), and the variation pattern specification command (81 series command), FIG. 15-48 (g1) shows. An effect image corresponding to such a fluctuation of a special symbol is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when there is no hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the designated command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designated command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial symbol ("123" as the decorative symbol and the small symbol in this example) stopped. ..

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the ending, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to win the second start winning opening in the probable change state after the big hit game state by forgetting to hit right. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by the feature section 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature unit 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect and V aiming effect by CPU120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)).
After that, while the first guidance display is terminated, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the third guide display is performed and the second guide display is continued from the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, aim at V as shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e13)). The part that displays the image corresponding to the production and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the game medium has changed from the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area to the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 15-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e16), V is aimed at and produced. The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (while the display is being performed) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIG. 15-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 15-51 and 15-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect and V aiming effect by CPU120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)).
After that, in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-38 (d1), (d2). ), While ending the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect is continued),
After that, in conjunction with the closure of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area (for example, FIGS. 15-44 (for example, FIG. 15-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, V as shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e16)). The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to the effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (while the display is being performed) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIG. 15-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 15-51 and 15-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect and V aiming effect by CPU120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)).
After that, by receiving the 1R opening command (for example, the command for opening the large winning opening (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-38). (D1), (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3Rs are completed (for example, a command designated after opening the large winning opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the command for opening the large winning opening (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 15-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the production aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, by receiving the V pass command (for example, the probability change determination device pass designation command (AD00 command)), the third guide display is terminated while the second guide display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-44). As shown in (e16), aiming at V and ending the image display corresponding to the effect, while continuing the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (while the display is being performed) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIG. 15-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 15-51 and 15-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. It is possible to make sure that the player is recognized, and then, while ending the large right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is continued as it is so as not to appeal to the player that the player is excessively right-handed. In addition, the production of aiming for V to aim at the V big winning opening is executed from the time when the V big winning opening is still closed, and by continuing as it is even after the V big winning opening is opened, V It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming at the big winning opening and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning opening. Further, after the V prize is generated and the V large prize opening is closed, the player can be prevented from giving unnecessary promotion notification by aiming at V and ending the effect. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is always required to hit right-handed even after the V-winning occurs before the V-large winning opening is opened. Can be prompted. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right. In addition, when an electric power failure occurs while the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the effect is supported by aiming at V. In both cases when a power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the text image of "Recovering ..." and the small image after the power is turned on. Since the image of the right-handed promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to at least urge the player to continue right-handed in the subsequent game even if a power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120)
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24 (for example, FIG. 15-24 ()). Including the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in c1).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and the first guidance display and during a predetermined period during a predetermined period during which a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed. The second guidance display is performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)).
In the period after the predetermined period, while the first guidance display is terminated, the second guidance display is continued (for example, a jackpot as shown in FIGS. 15-39 (e1) to 15-46 (e21)). The part that does not display the image corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect during the round, but continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect),
In a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after a big hit as shown in FIGS. 15-48 and 15-49). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect in the probabilistic state),
The second guide display is not affected by the background image switching display (for example, fade-out and fade-in switching display) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 15-38 (d1) to FIG. 15-38 (d1). As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d4), the portion where the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out).
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group notice effect) (for example, the image display by the group notice effect as shown in FIGS. 15-49 (g5)). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. Make sure to recognize it, and during the subsequent big hit round, end the big right-handed promotion effect while continuing the small right-handed promotion effect as it is so as not to appeal to the player excessively right-handed. Can be done. In addition, the player can always be encouraged to hit right by continuously executing the small right-handed promotion effect even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state is completed. Furthermore, after the big hit occurs, the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the big hit round after the fanfare effect is executed does not affect the small right-handed promotion effect, and the big hit game state is Since the small right-handed promotion effect is not affected by the image display such as the group notice effect performed in the probable change state or the time-saving state after the end, it is possible to encourage the player to always right-handed. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, to display an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamps are turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with each other twice),
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24). ), The part that outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect),
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c26) to 15-33 (c29)). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), after the start of the jackpot round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
In a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. When this happens, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot per special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not output sound in the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in the present embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without receiving the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, to display an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamps are turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with each other twice),
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24). ), The part that outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect),
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c26) to 15-33 (c29)). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), after the start of the jackpot round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
The guidance means is in a state different from the advantageous state, and in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is displayed. When the specific display result is obtained, the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot around the special figure 2, the frame lamp promotes a large right-handed strike. The part that does not light in the manner corresponding to).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in the present embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without receiving the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after the light emitting means is turned off (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, the light is turned off once and then hit to the right. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to FIGS. As shown in 15-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot around the special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R are used to promote the large right-handed strike. The part that does not output sound in the corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means
After turning off the light emitting means, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, after the light is turned off once, it corresponds to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous chan jackpot per special figure 2, the frame lamp responds to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light in the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the large right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2). In addition, characters appear step by step, and the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he is hitting right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed in the middle.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the final guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second time. Regarding the subsequent right-handed promotion, no sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. At the same time, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onward. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to the first right-handed promotion. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. Can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed in the middle.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the final guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, and then to the right. The sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the striking promotion, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. Sound is output and no sound is output in conjunction with the third right-handed promotion. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to each of the first and second right-handed promotion. Note that the sound data includes only sound data linked to one right-handed promotion, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. .. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice. .. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. Can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, FIG. 15-25 (c3)). As shown in the above, after turning off all the lamps of the frame lamp, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect).

Specifically, since all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, the player is encouraged to strike right-handed more easily and effectively. Can be done.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on the data defined by the lighting data table.
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIGS. 15-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance emission, and a child table (for example, a child table) that indicates a grandchild table in which the data referred to by the light emitting means is defined. , The child table shown in FIG. 15-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 15-36 and 15-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined by referring to the child table. Turn on / blink / turn off by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently turned on in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not perform the guided light emitting is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U of the attacker, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are turned off without being used in the large right-handed promotion effect, so that a grandchild table is provided. do not have. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guidance means emits the guidance light by sequentially moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player launches the game medium (for example, FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). A portion in which each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area as shown in 33).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, by turning on each lamp included in the frame lamps in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, a large right-handed promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a portion for lighting the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes the large right-handed promotion effect while being lit in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to right-handed.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the fade-in and fade-out switching display as the background image switching display performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 15-38 (d1)). ~ As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and the fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (d1) to 15-39 (d4), the small right-handed promotion effect switches the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big hit round. Continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the big hit round by the switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue to hit right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the notice effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 15). As shown in −49 (g5), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), the small right-handed promotion effect affects the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a big hit will occur in the probable change state after the big hit advantageous state ends. Continued without being done. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the advance notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right-handed promotion effect continue to be displayed without impairing the visibility. You can encourage the player to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2)). As described above, in the case of continuous chan per special figure 2, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan hits per special figure 2, the mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first hit. Does not output sound with, or the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by promoting right-handed striking in a manner of frequently emphasizing.

[Modification example of feature section 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the lights before executing the big right-handed promotion effect)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-25 (c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , Not limited to turning off all the lamps, some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the large right-handed promotion effect (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

(About switching display during big hit round)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (d1) to 15-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are performed. Although it has been illustrated that the switching display of the background image is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, an effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Further, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting a BGM (musical piece) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be displayed.

Further, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a mode selection screen for selecting the effect mode may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen may be displayed.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big hit round, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the display of the production image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified as the display of the effect image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ball state, a whiteout effect of inserting a pure white screen during the reach effect or a blackout effect effect of inserting a pure black screen may be used. You may use the effect of the pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or it is difficult to see the decorative pattern by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may use the effect to make it. In any case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the production aiming at V)
In the present embodiment, as a specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is illustrated, and V is aimed at as an effect. As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the production aiming at V, which is the third guidance display using the image display related to a specific area, is not limited to the one that points to the V big winning opening itself, but the one that points to the vicinity of the V big winning opening. It may also point to a route leading to the V-large winning opening, for example, a lid portion for opening and closing the V-large winning opening located on the upstream side of the V-large winning opening.

(About the big right-handed promotion production)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-31 (c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right-handed !!" appears. It was, but it is not limited to this. For example, the character image of "Right-handed !!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. Then, it may be composed of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About advantageous condition)
In the present embodiment, the period of the “advantageous state” is the period shown in FIGS. 15-24 (c1) to 15-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 15-20 to t16 in FIG. 15-21). ), But it is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is a period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, a period shown in FIGS. 15-39 (d3) to 15-47 (f4) (t4 to 15-21 in FIG. 15-20). (Period up to t16). Further, the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect may be executed during the period in which the symbol in which the big hit occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About right-handed promotion production in the case of the first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit per special figure 1, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. It was lit with, but it is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of big hit per special figure 1. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the jackpot per special figure 1 is a probabilistic jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output depending on the mode. Further, when the big hit in the special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make a sound in the manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. May not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chans per special figure 2)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan hits per special figure 2, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

Further, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of continuous chan per special figure 2. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the continuous chan hit in Special Figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R change to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. Further, when the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the speaker 8L, 8R responds to the large right-handed promotion effect. You may not output the sound with. When the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, unlike the first hit in the special figure 1, the frame lamp has a special mode (for example, gold or seven colors, etc.) according to the large right-handed promotion effect. ), Or the sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special manner according to the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right-handed promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit in the special figure 1. ..

(About the 3rd guidance display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display relating to the specific area, an image pointing to the V big winning opening during the big hit round in the probability variation big hit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the second start winning opening in the probable change state after the jackpot game state ends, or a variable winning ball It may be applied to display an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number specification command (C2 system command), a background specification command (95 system command), a symbol variation specification command (8D system command), and a display result from the CPU 103. Based on the reception of the designated command (8C series command) and the fluctuation pattern designation command (81 series command), "Aim!" With an arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). The character image of "" may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and character images in the small right-handed promotion effect may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost symbol)
In each of the above-mentioned feature parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always goes through the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 7 is illustrated. It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the lost symbol or a part of the small hit symbol.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost symbol or the big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time-saving symbol is won, the lottery will not be used to draw a lottery to determine whether or not there is a transition to the time-saving state, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the starting port (first starting winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the settings, so it is possible only if the set values cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the time saving number of times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the time reduction end symbol lottery (time reduction end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times until the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, it always goes through the jackpot gaming state, so that the player is encouraged to hit right in the time-saving state. It was possible to perform the big right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare production that is executed when a big hit occurs. However, when the lost symbol as described above is used as the time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure a time for executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect between the time when the symbol is displayed and the time when the time is controlled to be shortened. Therefore, the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect may be executed by the following methods.

For example, when the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of the lost symbol that is not the time-saving symbol stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the lost symbol that is the time-saving symbol stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. In the meantime, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of control in the time-saving state. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C system command), the CPU 103 is a command for specifying a loss, in addition to a display result specification command indicating a normal loss variation in which a time reduction is not given, a loss variation for a time reduction in which a time reduction is given. A display result designation command indicating the above may be prepared, and the effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 by properly using both commands depending on whether or not the time saving symbol is lost. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds when it receives the display result designation command indicating the normal loss fluctuation, and sets the symbol confirmation time when it receives the display result designation command indicating the loss fluctuation for shortening the time. May be 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image (for example, “time saving RUSH”) indicating the name of the time saving state on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound is output in the corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. A part of the time-saving fanfare effect can be made to correspond to a part of the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1), an image (for example, "O") congratulating the time saving state even before the name image ("time saving RUSH") produced by the time saving fanfare effect is displayed. The text image of "Medeto !!") is displayed on the image display device 5, the sound for congratulating the time saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting for congratulating the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to be a mode. In addition, as a small right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (characters of "right-handed") is displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. The right-handed sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may be changed to a right-handed display (lighting). The image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both are urging the player to hit right for the same period.

After that, as in the example shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2), the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed while the name image (“time-saving RUSH”) produced by the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then FIG. 15-25. After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), a large right-handed strike is promoted during the time-saving fanfare production as in the examples shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26). You may perform the production. During this time, the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed promotion effect may be continued as in the examples shown in FIGS. 15-48 to 15-50.

In this way, even when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time longer than the symbol confirmation time of the lost symbol that is not the time reduction symbol, the symbol confirmation time is greatly increased. It is possible to execute a striking promotion effect and a small right-handed striking promotion effect.

In addition, when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, the time reduction is not limited to the one that executes the large right-handed promotion effect or the small right-handed promotion effect by using the symbol confirmation time as described above. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the design is fixed, in the next game (variation), the time saving fanfare effect is executed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right are performed. You may perform a striking promotion effect. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) of the game in which the loss pattern is confirmed is a loss change, instead of performing a production that expects a hit such as a reach effect or a notice effect, a time-saving fanfare effect is performed. At the same time, a large right-handed promotion effect or a small right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol is confirmed is a big hit, then the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1) is executed, so that the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no hold memory for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare effect is executed while the symbol is not changed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration effect from being executed and the time saving fanfare effect not being hindered, the customer waiting demo designation command (9F system command) is not transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120. .. Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demo designation command (9F system command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning port 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 21 Gate switch 22A 1st start port switch 22B 2nd start port switch 23 Count switch 25A 1st hold indicator 25B 2nd hold indicator 25C Normal figure hold indicator 30 Ball hitting operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passing gate 81, 82 Solvent 100 Game control Microcomputer 101,121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 123 Display control unit 75SG001 Pachinko game machine 300 1st production unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 2nd production unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decorative unit 600 3 Production unit 800 4th production unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED substrate

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
Electronic components that are visible to the player and
A specific member provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component,
A translucent member which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Guidance display means to be performed and
With
The translucent member has a decorative pattern formed so as to straddle the electronic component and the specific member.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images